WO2022206489A1 - Method and apparatus for determining transmission configuration indicator (tci) state, and terminal device - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for determining transmission configuration indicator (tci) state, and terminal device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022206489A1
WO2022206489A1 PCT/CN2022/082267 CN2022082267W WO2022206489A1 WO 2022206489 A1 WO2022206489 A1 WO 2022206489A1 CN 2022082267 W CN2022082267 W CN 2022082267W WO 2022206489 A1 WO2022206489 A1 WO 2022206489A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
coreset
tci state
pdsch
coresets
tci
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/082267
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
卢艺文
黄秋萍
苏昕
高秋彬
Original Assignee
大唐移动通信设备有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 filed Critical 大唐移动通信设备有限公司
Publication of WO2022206489A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022206489A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to the field of mobile communication technologies, and in particular, to a method, an apparatus, and a terminal device for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication.
  • the terminal device when the time interval between receiving downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI) and receiving its scheduled downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Share Channel, PDSCH) is less than a threshold (Quasi co-location (QCL) ) duration), the terminal device has not yet decoded the DCI that schedules the PDSCH. At this time, it can be determined according to whether the RRC signaling received by the terminal device carries the target enable parameter (used to indicate that the two default TCI states are enabled) situation, to determine the default receive beam of the terminal device:
  • DCI Downlink Control Information
  • PDSCH Physical Downlink Share Channel
  • the terminal device can directly select the lowest index value (lowest ID) in the bandwidth part (Bandwidth Part, BWP).
  • the Transmission Configuration Indicator (TCI) state of the Control Resource Set (CORESET) is used as the default receive beam of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can directly select the TCI state in the codepoint of the lowest ID among the codepoints containing two TCI states as the two defaults of the terminal device. receive beam.
  • the default receive beam problem of the downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH) mainly exists in the following two situations.
  • the terminal device can be based on the synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SSB)/Channel State Information (Channel State Information, CSI) in the random access process-
  • synchronization signal block Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SSB
  • Channel State Information Channel State Information, CSI
  • RS Reference Signal
  • the terminal device can receive random access
  • the SSB/CSI-RS in the incoming process is used to determine the default receive beam of the PDCCH.
  • PDSCH supports the transmission mode of Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) 1a of Multiple Transmission and Reception Point (M-TRP), that is, all demodulation reference signals (Demodulation Reference Signals) of PDSCH.
  • Reference Signal, DMRS) ports are configured in two code division multiplexing (Code Division Multiplexing, CDM) groups, and are indicated to include two TCI codepoints in TCI states, the first TCI state and the antenna indicated by the DCI scheduling the PDSCH The CDM group corresponding to the first antenna port in the ports is associated, and the second TCI state is associated with the CDM group corresponding to another DMRS port.
  • M-TRP transmission of PDCCH is not supported for the time being.
  • a new PDCCH transmission scheme of M-TRP is proposed to be added, that is, the PDCCH transmission scheme of repeated transmission, in which the search space (Search Space, SS) set Set in the CORESET of two repeated transmissions can be
  • the association configuration is performed through RRC configuration, and two CORESETs that include two SS sets associated with each other transmit the same DCI.
  • Repeated transmission can transmit the same downlink control information through frequency division multiplexing (Frequency Division Multiplex, FDM) or through time division multiplexing (Time Division Multiplex, TDM).
  • FDM Frequency Division Multiplex
  • TDM Time Division Multiplex
  • a new M-TRP PDSCH/PDCCH single frequency network (Single Frequency Network, SFN) transmission scheme in which the data layer of PDSCH/PDCCH and the channel of the DMRS port of PDSCH/PDCCH are associated with one
  • the or more QCL reference signals have a QCL relationship with respect to at least one channel large-scale parameter. Therefore, the data layer of PDSCH/PDCCH and the DMRS port of PDSCH/PDCCH come from the transmission of multiple TRPs.
  • the threshold QCL duration
  • the enabling parameter used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled
  • the receive beam at this time has only one TCI state.
  • the lowest ID CORESET of the PDCCH has 2 TCI states. Therefore, the default receiving beam of the PDSCH, that is, the TCI state of the PDSCH cannot be determined according to the existing rules.
  • the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter
  • two TCI states are directly selected in the codepoint of the lowest ID after MAC-CE activation, instead of selecting the optimal TCI state, so the PDSCH cannot be accurately identified.
  • the data is demodulated, and the performance is greatly reduced.
  • the PDCCH intends to receive the SFN transmission scheme through the RRC configuration, but if the MAC-CE has not activated the TCI status of the PDCCH at this time, based on the existing determination method (using the SSB in the random access process) / CSI-RS TCI state), only one TCI state can be determined, but two TCI states of the PDCCH cannot be determined.
  • the embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method, an apparatus, and a terminal device for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, so as to solve the problem in the prior art when the PDSCH supports the SFN transmission mode, and the PDCCH supports the SFN transmission mode or the non-SFN transmission mode.
  • the question of TCI status is a method, an apparatus, and a terminal device for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, so as to solve the problem in the prior art when the PDSCH supports the SFN transmission mode, and the PDCCH supports the SFN transmission mode or the non-SFN transmission mode.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
  • the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
  • the network device Before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
  • CORESET is selected according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter or not. Rules and TCI state selection rules to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  • the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values;
  • the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH includes:
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the method further includes:
  • N When N is greater than or equal to 2, receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
  • a default beam sent by the network device is received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH includes:
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration
  • the TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration
  • the corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the method further includes:
  • the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode
  • determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule including:
  • K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
  • the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
  • the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
  • the L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, including:
  • the first CORESET determines that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
  • determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule including:
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the first CORESET is the reference CORESET
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
  • determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule including:
  • a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle
  • the target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • selecting a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs including;
  • the reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  • the method further includes:
  • the two default beams sent by the network device are respectively received within the time interval by using the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal device, including a memory, a transceiver, and a processor;
  • the memory is used to store a computer program; the transceiver is used to send and receive data under the control of the processor; the processor is used to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:
  • the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH.
  • Target transmission mode, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
  • the transceiver Before the transceiver receives the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, the transceiver determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the corresponding SFN transmission mode of the PDSCH.
  • the target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
  • the transceiver When the transceiver receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the transceiver is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter situation, CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  • the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the transceiver is controlled to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration
  • the TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration
  • the corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode
  • controlling the transceiver to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH
  • the transceiver When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, the transceiver is controlled to receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI state.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
  • the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
  • the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
  • the processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
  • the first CORESET determines that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the first CORESET is the reference CORESET
  • the processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
  • the processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs
  • the processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle
  • the target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  • the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the transceiver is controlled to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval through the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an apparatus for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
  • the first receiving module is used to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH
  • the corresponding target transmission mode, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
  • the first determining module is configured to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, and according to the The target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
  • the second determination module is configured to, when the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target command The condition of the parameters, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a processor-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the processor-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the transmission described in the first aspect above is implemented Configure the determination method to indicate the TCI status.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a computer program, including computer-readable codes, which, when the computer-readable codes are executed on a computing and processing device, cause the computing and processing device to execute the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the transport configuration indicates the method for determining the TCI status.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a computer-readable medium, in which the computer program described in the fifth aspect is stored.
  • the TCI status of the PDSCH can be determined according to the PDSCH configuration, and the TCI status of the PDCCH can be determined according to different transmission modes of the PDCCH.
  • the TCI state of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of the PDSCH and PDCCH data.
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Fig. 2a shows the schematic diagram 1 of the corresponding CORESET in the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Fig. 2b shows the second schematic diagram of the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing that the corresponding CORESETs in the target BWP of the embodiment of the present disclosure form SS Set associations at the same time;
  • FIG. 4 shows one of the schematic diagrams of forming SS Set associations at different times between the corresponding CORESETs in the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 shows the second schematic diagram of the formation of SS Set associations between the corresponding CORESETs in the target BWP of the embodiment of the present disclosure at different times;
  • Fig. 6 shows the schematic diagram of forming SS Set associations at different times and at the same time corresponding to CORESETs in the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 shows a structural block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • Figure 9 schematically shows a block diagram of a computing processing device for performing methods according to the present disclosure
  • Figure 10 schematically shows a memory unit for holding or carrying program code implementing the method according to the present disclosure.
  • the term "and/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, and indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships. For example, A and/or B can indicate that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone these three situations.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship.
  • the term “plurality” refers to two or more than two, and other quantifiers are similar.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method and apparatus for determining the TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, so as to realize the determination of the TCI state of the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode of the PDSCH and the target transmission mode of the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE
  • the TCI status of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of PDSCH and PDCCH data.
  • the method and the device are conceived based on the same application. Since the principles of the method and the device for solving the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and repeated descriptions will not be repeated here.
  • the applicable system may be a global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, a wideband code division multiple access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) general packet Wireless service (general packet radio service, GPRS) system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) system, Long term evolution advanced (LTE-A) system, universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) system, 5G New Radio (New Radio, NR) system, etc.
  • GSM global system of mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • general packet Wireless service general packet Radio service
  • GPRS general packet Wireless service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • LTE-A Long term evolution advanced
  • the terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the name of the user equipment may be different.
  • the terminal equipment may be called user equipment.
  • Wireless terminal equipment can communicate with one or more core networks (Core Network, CN) via a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN). "telephone) and computers with mobile terminal equipment, eg portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-built or vehicle-mounted mobile devices, which exchange language and/or data with the radio access network.
  • Core Network Core Network
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • Wireless terminal equipment may also be referred to as system, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, access point , a remote terminal device (remote terminal), an access terminal device (access terminal), a user terminal device (user terminal), a user agent (user agent), and a user device (user device), which are not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a base station, and the base station may include a plurality of cells providing services for the terminal.
  • the base station may also be called an access point, or may be a device in the access network that communicates with wireless terminal equipment through one or more sectors on the air interface, or other names.
  • the network device can be used to exchange received air frames with Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and act as a router between the wireless terminal device and the rest of the access network, which can include the Internet. Protocol (IP) communication network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the network devices may also coordinate attribute management for the air interface.
  • the network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a network device (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA). ), it can also be a network device (NodeB) in Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), or it can be an evolved network device in a long term evolution (LTE) system (evolutional Node B, eNB or e-NodeB), 5G base station (gNB) in 5G network architecture (next generation system), or Home evolved Node B (HeNB), relay node (relay node) , a home base station (femto), a pico base station (pico), etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node and a distributed unit (DU) node, and the centralized unit and the distributed unit may also be geographically separated.
  • MIMO transmission can be single-user MIMO (Single User MIMO, SU-MIMO) or multi-user MIMO. (Multiple User MIMO, MU-MIMO). According to the form and number of root antenna combinations, MIMO transmission can be 2D-MIMO, 3D-MIMO, FD-MIMO, or massive-MIMO, or diversity transmission, precoding transmission, or beamforming transmission.
  • the following describes a method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication applied to a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the method includes:
  • Step 101 Receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the target transmission corresponding to the downlink control channel PDCCH.
  • the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M (M is a positive integer, the minimum value is 1) CORESET configurations (configurations corresponding to a certain moment), the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and the PDCCH.
  • M is a positive integer, the minimum value is 1) CORESET configurations (configurations corresponding to a certain moment), the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and the PDCCH.
  • the corresponding target transmission mode, the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH may be SFN transmission or non-SFN transmission.
  • For each CORESET configuration it can include the time-frequency resource location and N TCI state index values. The value of N can be different.
  • Step 102 Before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • the terminal device Before receiving the MAC-CE activation information sent by the network device, the terminal device can determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH carried in the RRC signaling, and according to the target transmission corresponding to the PDCCH carried in the RRC signaling. way to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH may be SFN transmission or non-SFN transmission, and for different transmission modes, the methods for determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH are also different.
  • Step 103 When the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter. , CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  • the terminal device may determine the corresponding CORESETs according to the time-frequency resource positions in the CORESET configuration, that is, may determine the corresponding M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions. Since the CORESET configuration includes N TCI state index values, and each TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, each CORESET may include at least one TCI state.
  • the activation information of the MAC-CE When the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold (quasi-co-location duration), it can be determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, CORESET selection rule and The TCI state selection rule determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. That is, when the terminal device receives the target enable parameter and when it does not receive the target enable parameter, the method of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is also different.
  • the CORESET may be first determined according to the CORESET selection rule, and then the TCI state may be determined according to the TCI state selection rule.
  • the TCI status of the PDSCH can be determined according to the PDSCH configuration, and the TCI status of the PDCCH can be determined according to different transmission modes of the PDCCH.
  • the TCI state of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of the PDSCH and PDCCH data.
  • the RRC signaling also carries the PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state indexes value;
  • the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH includes:
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the RRC signaling also carries the PDSCH configuration, where the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, and the value of N ranges from 1 to 128.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, different schemes may be adopted for different values of N.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values may be determined as the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH for the N TCI state index values.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access can be determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, that is, only one TCI state is determined at this time .
  • the method further includes:
  • N When N is greater than or equal to 2, receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
  • a default beam sent by the network device is received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the default beam sent by the network device may be received according to the determined TCI state. Because before the PDSCH corresponds to SFN transmission and the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, one or two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined according to the different values of N in the PDSCH configuration. The case of receiving the default beam is distinguished.
  • the value of N is greater than or equal to 2
  • the two default beams sent by the network device can be respectively received through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH; the value of N is 1
  • a default beam sent by the network device can be received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the above embodiment of the present disclosure is an implementation process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and receiving the default beam sent by the network device before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE.
  • the PDSCH is determined in a corresponding manner according to different values of N in the PDSCH configuration.
  • the corresponding TCI state, and then adopting the determined TCI state to receive the default beam sent by the network device can ensure correct reception of PDSCH data.
  • the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE includes: :
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration
  • the TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration
  • the corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access may be directly determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • a CORESET configuration including one TCI state index value is determined, and a CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values is determined.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access can be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration.
  • set the The TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration respectively are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET in the M CORESETs.
  • the method further includes:
  • the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode
  • the default beam sent by the network device may be received according to the determined TCI state.
  • the TCI states determined according to the different transmission modes corresponding to the PDCCH are different, so it is necessary to distinguish the reception default beam according to the different transmission modes corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • each CORESET can correspond to one or two TCIs Status, for each CORESET, receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI status.
  • the above embodiment of the present disclosure is an implementation process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH and receiving the default beam sent by the network device before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, and then using The determined TCI state receives the default beam sent by the network device, which can ensure correct reception of PDCCH data.
  • determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE includes:
  • K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
  • the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
  • each CORESET After receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, determine the TCI corresponding to PDSCH according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter (that is, whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter), the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule In the state, the K CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP can be determined from the M CORESETs according to the target BWP corresponding to the terminal device. Among them, since 1 BWP corresponds to 3 CORESETs at most, the maximum value of K is 3. Since M The minimum value of 1 is 1, so the minimum value of K is 1. Wherein, after the activation of the MAC-CE, that is, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, each CORESET may include at most two TCI states.
  • L reference CORESETs may be determined according to a preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, at least one reference CORESET and at most 3 reference CORESETs may be determined.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter. That is, when the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs; in the RRC signaling When the target enabling parameter is carried in the TCI, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule.
  • the CORESET configuration further includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SSSet in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
  • the L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, including:
  • the first CORESET determines that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the second CORESETs include one TCI state, and the two second CORESETs include different TCI states ;
  • the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET each include one TCI state, and the third CORESET The third CORESET and the fourth CORESET include different TCI states.
  • the CORESET index value and the association between the SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs may also be included.
  • the following detection sequence may be performed to determine the L reference CORESETs: first, check whether there is a first CORESET including two TCI states in the K CORESETs, and if so, determine the first CORESET as a reference CORESET, at this time, the minimum number of the first CORESET is 1 and the maximum is K, that is, the minimum value of the reference CORESET is 1 and the maximum is K.
  • each second CORESET includes one TCI state, and the two second CORESETs correspond to different TCI states.
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are determined to be two reference CORESETs, that is, the number of reference CORESETs is two.
  • both the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET include one TCI state, and the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET correspond to different TCI states. That is, the two CORESETs that form an SS Set association correspond to different TCI states.
  • the above process is to first detect whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, if not, detect whether there are two second CORESETs in the K CORESETs, if not, detect whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs.
  • L reference CORESETs can be determined.
  • the number of reference CORESETs ranges from 1 to K.
  • the reference The value of the number of CORESETs is 2, and in the case that the first CORESET and the second CORESET do not exist in the K CORESETs, and the third CORESET exists, the value of the reference CORESET number is 2.
  • the priorities of the first CORESET, the second CORESET and the third CORESET are sequentially decreased.
  • the first CORESET can be preferentially determined as the reference CORESET, and when the first CORESET does not exist in the K CORESETs, the second CORESET can be determined as the reference CORESET.
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET may be determined as the reference CORESET, so that the reference CORESET is determined according to the priority.
  • determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule includes:
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • each CORESET configuration may further include a CORESET index value
  • the first target CORESET can be accurately determined by screening the L reference CORESETs based on the CORESET index value, and then the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be quickly determined on the basis of the first target CORESET.
  • the way to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is as follows: The following describes the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH for the case where the reference CORESET is a different CORESET.
  • the first CORESET is the reference CORESET
  • a TCI state is selected and determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, including:
  • the first CORESET is the reference CORESET
  • the first target CORESET is determined and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined
  • the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value, among the L reference CORESETs, the one corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value may be selected.
  • the selected first CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET.
  • any one of the two TCI states in the first target CORESET may be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, that is, the first
  • the first TCI state in the target CORESET (the TCI state with a relatively high TCI state index value) is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET (the TCI state index value is relatively high) is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the subsequent TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter)
  • the target enable parameter the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter
  • a specific example is used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, receive the MAC-CE
  • the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, wherein the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to Figure 2a, when the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) all include two TCI states, select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value, and place the selected CORESET in the The first TCI state (TCI state #0) or the second TCI state (TCI state #1) is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the CORESET#0 including two TCI states is determined as the first target CORESET, and the first TCI state (TCI state #0) or the second target CORESET in CORESET#0 is determined.
  • TCI state #1 is determined as one TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the corresponding TCI states in the three CORESETs may also be other situations, which will not be listed and described here.
  • the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, there may be other implementation situations for determining the TCI states corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH, which are not listed here.
  • the first target CORESET by selecting the first CORESET with the lowest index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET, the first target CORESET can be determined based on the principle of the lowest index value.
  • a TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, which can ensure the optionality of the TCI state.
  • the second CORESET is the reference CORESET
  • the first target CORESET is determined and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined
  • the two reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value, among the two reference CORESETs, the one corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value may be selected.
  • the selected second CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET. Since the first target CORESET includes one TCI state, the TCI state in the first target CORESET may be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter)
  • the target enable parameter the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter
  • a specific example is used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, receive the MAC-CE
  • the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128).
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs.
  • the terminal device can think that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRP frequency division multiplexing, so the terminal device can select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value among the two correlated CORESETs, and then select the CORESET in the selected CORESET
  • the TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the SS set associations in the three CORESETs can also be other situations, which are not listed here.
  • the second CORESET is the reference CORESET, there may be other implementation situations for determining the TCI states corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH, which are not listed here.
  • the second CORESET with the lowest index value among the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET it is possible to determine the first target CORESET based on the principle of the lowest index value in the two second CORESETs associated with the SS Set at the same time.
  • the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the quickness of the determination of the TCI state can be ensured.
  • the lowest CORESET can be selected from the two reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value for the two reference CORESETs For the CORESET corresponding to the index value, the selected CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET. Since the first target CORESET includes one TCI state, the TCI state in the first target CORESET may be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter)
  • the target enable parameter the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter
  • a specific example is used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, receive the MAC-CE
  • the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is 1).
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; for PDCCH, the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state.
  • the TCI state of the RS is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • each of the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) includes one TCI state, wherein CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are the target BWPs at another moment in time The corresponding 3 CORESETs.
  • the terminal device can consider that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRPs. Therefore, The terminal device may select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value among the two correlated CORESETs, and then determine the TCI state in the selected CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the association of SS sets in different CORESETs at different times can also be in other situations (for example, the SS set in CORESET#0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#4, and the SS set in CORESET#1 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#4. ), which will not be listed here.
  • the third CORESET is the reference CORESET, there may be other implementation situations for determining the TCI states corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH, which are not listed here.
  • the CORESET with the lowest index value among the two reference CORESETs as the first target CORESET it is possible to determine the first target CORESET in the two CORESETs associated with the SS Sets at different times based on the principle of the lowest index value. Determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can ensure the quickness of the TCI state determination.
  • the following describes the process of determining the TCI state through two specific examples for the case that the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter).
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128).
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs. Referring to FIG. 5 , it is detected in the target BWP that CORESET#0 includes one TCI state, and CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 include two TCI states respectively.
  • CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state.
  • the terminal device detects the reference CORESET, it first detects whether there is a CORESET including two TCI states. Since CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 respectively include two TCI states, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as the reference CORESET. Then, the CORESET (CORESET#1) corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value is determined as the first target CORESET, and any TCI state in the CORESET#1 is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the priority of the CORESET including the two TCI states is higher than the priority of the CORESET forming the SS set association, so CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as reference CORESETs.
  • the terminal device receives RRC signaling sent by the network device, wherein the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (PDSCH configuration). It includes N TCI state index values, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128).
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs.
  • CORESET#0, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 monitored in the target BWP respectively include a TCI state.
  • CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state.
  • the SS set in CORESET#0 in time 0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1
  • the SS set in CORESET#1 in time 0 is related to the SS set in CORESET#2 in time 0.
  • the terminal device can think that CORESET#0 and CORESET#3 are sent by different TRP time division multiplexing, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are sent by different TRP frequency division multiplexing, the terminal device preferentially selects the same TRP
  • the two CORESETs (CORESET#1, CORESET#2) that are related to each other in the moment are the reference CORESETs, and then the CORESET (CORESET#1) with the lowest CORESET index value in the reference CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET, and the TCI in CORESET#1 is determined as the first target CORESET.
  • the state is determined to be the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • CORESET#1, CORESET# 2 Determined as the reference CORESET.
  • determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule includes:
  • a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle
  • the target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule when the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs, for the case where the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, since each CORESET configuration can also Including the CORESET index value, at this time, a second target CORESET can be selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index values corresponding to the reference CORESETs, and since the first CORESET is a CORESET including two TCI states, it can be selected in the After the second target CORESET, the two TCI states in the second target CORESET are determined as TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule when determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs, for the case where the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and
  • two reference CORESETs can be determined as two second target CORESETs according to the SS set association principle, specifically, according to the SS set association at the same time, the two second CORESETs are determined as two second targets CORESET, according to the association of SS sets at different times, the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are determined as two second target CORESETs.
  • the TCI states in the two second CORESETs may be Combining is performed, and the combined two TCI states are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET respectively include one TCI state, and the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET correspond to different TCI states, for the case where the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are determined as two second target CORESETs, it is possible to The TCI states in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are combined, and the combined two TCI states are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined.
  • the second target CORESET when the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, the second target CORESET can be determined according to the CORESET index value, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined according to the TCI state in the second target CORESET; when the reference CORESET is the second CORESET , combine the TCI states in the two second CORESETs according to the SS set association at the same time, to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the TCI state combination, when the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, according to different time
  • the SS set association combines the TCI states in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the TCI state combination.
  • selecting a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs including;
  • the reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  • the reference CORESET with the lowest CORESET index value may be filtered out of the L reference CORESETs, and the filtered reference CORESET is determined as the second target CORESET. That is, it is implemented to determine the second target CORESET based on the principle of the lowest index value.
  • the target enabling parameters are carried in the RRC signaling, that is, the terminal device receives the target enabling parameters
  • several specific examples are used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, and the receiving MAC
  • the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, wherein the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, SFN transmission modes corresponding to PDSCH, SFN transmission modes corresponding to PDCCH, PDSCH configurations, and target enabling parameters.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH may be determined according to the CORESET including two TCI states.
  • the corresponding TCI states in the three CORESETs may also be other situations, which will not be listed and described here.
  • the process after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE is the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the first CORESET.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128) and a target enable parameter.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs.
  • the terminal device may consider that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRP frequency division multiplexing, and the terminal device may select two CORESETs that are related to each other and combine them together to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined according to the TCI corresponding to the two CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same time.
  • the process after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE is the case where the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined based on the second CORESET.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is 1) and the target enable parameter.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; for PDCCH, the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state.
  • the TCI state of the RS is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • each of the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) includes one TCI state, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. 3 CORESETs.
  • the terminal device can consider that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRPs.
  • the device may combine the TCI state corresponding to CORESET#0 and the TCI state corresponding to CORESET#3 to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the association of SS sets in different CORESETs at different times can also be in other situations, which will not be listed here.
  • the process after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE is the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128) and the target enable parameter.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and for each CORESET configuration including at least one
  • determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs.
  • CORESET#0 monitored in the target BWP includes one TCI state
  • CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 respectively include two TCI states.
  • CORESET#3, CORESET#4 and CORESET#5 are the three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another time.
  • CORESET#3, CORESET#4 and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state.
  • the SS set in #0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1.
  • the terminal device detects the reference CORESET, it first detects whether there is a CORESET including two TCI states. Since CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 respectively include two TCI states, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as the reference CORESET. Then, the CORESET (CORESET#1) corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value is determined as the first target CORESET, and the two TCI states in CORESET#1 are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the priority of the CORESET including the two TCI states is higher than the priority of the CORESET forming the SS set association, so CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as reference CORESETs.
  • the terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128) and a target enable parameter.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
  • the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs.
  • CORESET#0, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 monitored in the target BWP respectively include a TCI state.
  • CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state.
  • the SS set in CORESET#0 in time 0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1
  • the SS set in CORESET#1 in time 0 is related to the SS set in CORESET#2 in time 0.
  • the terminal device can consider that CORESET#0 and CORESET#3 are sent by different TRP time-division multiplexing, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are sent by different TRP frequency-division multiplexing, and the terminal device preferentially selects the same time
  • the two CORESETs (CORESET#1 and CORESET#2) that are correlated with each other are the reference CORESETs, and then the TCI states in the reference CORESETs are combined to determine the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the method after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further includes:
  • the two default beams sent by the network device are respectively received within the time interval by using the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the terminal device may receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH within a time interval. Or receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH within the time interval.
  • a default receive beam sent by a network device can be received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, or two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be received. Receive two default beams sent by network devices.
  • the TCI state of the PDSCH can be determined according to the PDSCH configuration, and the TCI state of the PDSCH can be determined according to the different transmissions of the PDCCH.
  • the TCI state of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of PDSCH and PDCCH data.
  • an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an apparatus for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
  • the first receiving module 701 is configured to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel
  • the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
  • the first determining module 702 is configured to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device,
  • the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
  • the second determining module 703 is configured to, when the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than a preset threshold, determine whether the target is carried in the RRC signaling according to whether the The condition of enabling parameters, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  • the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the first determining module includes:
  • the first determination sub-module is used to determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values respectively when the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, as Two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the second determination sub-module is used to determine the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access when the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1 is a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the device further includes:
  • the second receiving module is configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, in the case where N is greater than or equal to 2, use the two corresponding PDSCH two TCI states respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device;
  • the third receiving module is configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, in the case where the value of N is 1, through the corresponding PDSCH A TCI state receives a default beam sent by the network device.
  • the first determining module includes:
  • the third determination sub-module is configured to determine the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access when the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
  • the fourth determination sub-module is used for, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, when the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, the SSB/CSI-RS during random access
  • the TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration.
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration are determined. is the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the device further includes:
  • a fourth receiving module configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, in the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, pass the PDCCH A corresponding TCI state receives a default beam sent by the network device;
  • a fifth receiving module configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, in the case that the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, One or two default beams sent by the network device are received through the corresponding TCI state.
  • the second determining module includes:
  • the fifth determination submodule is used to determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP among the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3 ;
  • the sixth determination sub-module is used to determine L reference CORESETs according to a preset strategy after determining K CORESETs, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • a seventh determination sub-module configured to determine in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule when the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the eighth determination sub-module is configured to, when the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs Determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SSSet in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
  • the sixth determination submodule includes:
  • a first detection unit configured to detect whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
  • a first determining unit configured to determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET in the presence of the first CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • a second detection unit configured to detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs in the absence of the first CORESET;
  • a second determining unit configured to determine that two of the second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs when there are two of the second CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
  • a third detection unit configured to detect whether there is a third CORESET among the K CORESETs in the absence of two of the second CORESETs, where the SS Set in the third CORESET and the target BWP are at another moment
  • the SS Set in the fourth CORESET in the corresponding P CORESETs forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • a third determining unit configured to determine that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs in the presence of the third CORESET, and both the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are Include a TCI status.
  • the seventh determination submodule is further used for:
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the seventh determination sub-module is further configured to:
  • the seventh determination submodule is further configured to:
  • the seventh determination submodule is further configured to:
  • the eighth determination submodule includes:
  • a first processing unit configured to select a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs in the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, Determining the two TCI states in the second target CORESET as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • a second processing unit configured to associate the two reference CORESETs according to the SS set association principle when the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET
  • the CORESETs are determined as two second target CORESETs, the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs are combined, and the combined two TCI states are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the first processing unit is further configured to:
  • the reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  • the apparatus after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the apparatus further includes:
  • a sixth receiving module configured to receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval through a determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • a seventh receiving module configured to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval by using the two determined TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present disclosure may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a processor-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the present disclosure can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
  • the terminal device includes a memory 801, a transceiver 802, and a processor 803; the memory 801 is used to store a computer program; 803 to receive and send data under the control; processor 803, for reading the computer program in the memory 801 and performing the following operations:
  • the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH corresponding
  • the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
  • the transceiver 802 Before the transceiver 802 receives the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, it determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the PDCCH The corresponding target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
  • the transceiver 802 When the transceiver 802 receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the transceiver 802 is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter situation, CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  • the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • control the transceiver 802 to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the transceiver 802 is controlled to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
  • the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration
  • the TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration
  • the corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode
  • the transceiver 802 is controlled to receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI state.
  • processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP in the M CORESETs where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
  • the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
  • the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the first CORESET determines that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
  • the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
  • the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
  • processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
  • the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle
  • the target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
  • the transceiver 802 is controlled to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval through the two determined TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  • the bus architecture may include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, specifically, one or more processors represented by processor 803 and various circuits of memory represented by memory 801 are linked together.
  • the bus architecture may also link together various other circuits, such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art and, therefore, will not be described further herein.
  • the bus interface provides the interface.
  • Transceiver 802 may be multiple elements, ie, including transmitters and receivers, providing means for communicating with various other devices over transmission media including wireless channels, wired channels, fiber optic cables, and the like.
  • the user interface 804 may also be an interface capable of externally connecting the required equipment, and the connected equipment includes but is not limited to a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick, and the like.
  • the processor 803 is responsible for managing the bus architecture and general processing, and the memory 801 may store data used by the processor 803 in performing operations.
  • the processor 803 may be a central processor (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device). , CPLD), the processor can also use a multi-core architecture.
  • CPU central processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
  • the processor 803 is configured to execute the method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure according to the obtained executable instructions by invoking the computer program stored in the memory.
  • the processor 803 and the memory 801 may also be arranged physically separately.
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure also provide a processor-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the processor-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the above-mentioned method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication is implemented. A step of.
  • the processor-readable storage medium can be any available medium or data storage device that can be accessed by a processor, including, but not limited to, magnetic storage (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape, magneto-optical disk (MO), etc.), optical storage (eg, CD, DVD, BD, HVD, etc.), and semiconductor memory (eg, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, non-volatile memory (NAND FLASH), solid-state disk (SSD)), etc.
  • magnetic storage eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape, magneto-optical disk (MO), etc.
  • optical storage eg, CD, DVD, BD, HVD, etc.
  • semiconductor memory eg, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, non-volatile memory (NAND FLASH), solid-state disk (SSD)
  • Embodiments of the present disclosure also provide a computer program, including computer-readable code, which, when the computer-readable code is executed on a computing and processing device, causes the computing and processing device to execute the above-mentioned method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication .
  • embodiments of the present disclosure may be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Accordingly, the present disclosure may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present disclosure may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media having computer-usable program code embodied therein, including but not limited to disk storage, optical storage, and the like.
  • processor-executable instructions may also be stored in a processor-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the processor-readable memory result in the manufacture of means including the instructions product, the instruction means implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowchart and/or the block or blocks of the block diagram.
  • processor-executable instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process that Execution of the instructions provides steps for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart or blocks and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative, wherein the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in One place, or it can be distributed over multiple network elements. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand and implement it without creative effort.
  • Various component embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented in hardware, or in software modules running on one or more processors, or in a combination thereof.
  • a microprocessor or a digital signal processor (DSP) may be used in practice to implement some or all of the functions of some or all of the components in a computing processing device according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • the present disclosure can also be implemented as apparatus or apparatus programs (eg, computer programs and computer program products) for performing some or all of the methods described herein.
  • Such a program implementing the present disclosure may be stored on a computer-readable medium, or may be in the form of one or more signals. Such signals may be downloaded from Internet sites, or provided on carrier signals, or in any other form.
  • Figure 9 illustrates a computing processing device that may implement methods in accordance with the present disclosure.
  • the computing processing device traditionally includes a processor 910 and a computer program product or computer readable medium in the form of a memory 920 .
  • the memory 920 may be electronic memory such as flash memory, EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), EPROM, hard disk, or ROM.
  • the memory 920 has storage space 930 for program code 931 for performing any of the method steps in the above-described methods.
  • the storage space 930 for program codes may include various program codes 931 for implementing various steps in the above methods, respectively. These program codes can be read from or written to one or more computer program products.
  • These computer program products include program code carriers such as hard disks, compact disks (CDs), memory cards or floppy disks. Such computer program products are typically portable or fixed storage units as described with reference to FIG. 10 .
  • the storage unit may have storage segments, storage spaces, etc. arranged similarly to the memory 920 in the computing processing device of FIG. 9 .
  • the program code may, for example, be compressed in a suitable form.
  • the storage unit includes computer readable code 931', ie code readable by a processor such as 910, for example, which when executed by a computing processing device, causes the computing processing device to perform any of the methods described above. of the various steps.
  • any reference signs placed between parentheses shall not be construed as limiting the claim.
  • the word “comprising” does not exclude the presence of elements or steps not listed in a claim.
  • the word “a” or “an” preceding an element does not exclude the presence of a plurality of such elements.
  • the present disclosure may be implemented by means of hardware comprising several different elements and by means of a suitably programmed computer. In a unit claim enumerating several means, several of these means may be embodied by one and the same item of hardware.
  • the use of the words first, second, and third, etc. do not denote any order. These words can be interpreted as names.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure provides a method and apparatus for determining a transmission configuration indicator (TCI) state, and a terminal device. The method comprises: receiving RRC signaling sent by a network device; before receiving activation information of an MAC-CE, determining, according to an SFN transmission mode corresponding to a PDSCH in the RRC signaling, a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, and determining, according to a target transmission mode corresponding to a PDCCH in the RRC signaling, a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH; and when the activation information of the MAC-CE is received, and a time interval between the reception of DCI and the reception of a PDSCH scheduled by the DCI is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries a target enable parameter, and according to a CORESET selection rule and a TCI state selection rule, determining a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. By means of the present disclosure, correct reception of PDSCH and PDCCH data can be ensured.

Description

传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法、装置及终端设备Method, device and terminal device for determining TCI status of transmission configuration indication
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本公开要求在2021年4月1日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110358443.8、名称为“传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法、装置及终端设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本公开中。This disclosure claims the priority of a Chinese patent application with application number 202110358443.8 and entitled "Method, Apparatus and Terminal Equipment for Determining TCI Status of Transmission Configuration Indication" filed with the Chinese Patent Office on April 1, 2021, the entire contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference Incorporated in this disclosure.
技术领域technical field
本公开涉及移动通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法、装置及终端设备。The present disclosure relates to the field of mobile communication technologies, and in particular, to a method, an apparatus, and a terminal device for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication.
背景技术Background technique
在Rel-16中,当接收下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)与接收其调度的下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Share Channel,PDSCH)的时间间隔小于门限(准共址(Quasi co-location,QCL)持续时长)时,终端设备暂未解出调度该PDSCH的DCI,此时可以根据终端设备接收到的RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数(用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能)的情况,来确定终端设备的默认接收波束:In Rel-16, when the time interval between receiving downlink control information (Downlink Control Information, DCI) and receiving its scheduled downlink shared channel (Physical Downlink Share Channel, PDSCH) is less than a threshold (Quasi co-location (QCL) ) duration), the terminal device has not yet decoded the DCI that schedules the PDSCH. At this time, it can be determined according to whether the RRC signaling received by the terminal device carries the target enable parameter (used to indicate that the two default TCI states are enabled) situation, to determine the default receive beam of the terminal device:
1.若无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)信令中不携带目标使能参数,根据目前协议,终端设备可直接选择将带宽部分(Bandwidth Part,BWP)内的最低索引值(lowest ID)的控制资源集(Control Resource Set,CORESET)的传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indicator,TCI)状态作为终端设备的默认接收波束。1. If the radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling does not carry the target enable parameter, according to the current protocol, the terminal device can directly select the lowest index value (lowest ID) in the bandwidth part (Bandwidth Part, BWP). The Transmission Configuration Indicator (TCI) state of the Control Resource Set (CORESET) is used as the default receive beam of the terminal device.
2.若RRC信令中携带目标使能参数,根据目前协议,终端设备可直接在包含两个TCI状态的码点(codepoint)中选择lowest ID的codepoint中的TCI状态作为终端设备的两个默认接收波束。2. If the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, according to the current protocol, the terminal device can directly select the TCI state in the codepoint of the lowest ID among the codepoints containing two TCI states as the two defaults of the terminal device. receive beam.
在Rel-16中,下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)的默认接收波束问题主要存在于以下两种情况。In Rel-16, the default receive beam problem of the downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH) mainly exists in the following two situations.
1.针对接收PDCCH在RRC配置之前的情况,根据目前协议,终端设备可根据随机接入过程中的同步信号块(Synchronization Signal and PBCH block,SSB)/信道状态信息(Channel State Information,CSI)-参考信号(Reference Signal,RS)来确定PDCCH的默认接收波束。1. For the situation where the PDCCH is received before the RRC configuration, according to the current protocol, the terminal device can be based on the synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal and PBCH block, SSB)/Channel State Information (Channel State Information, CSI) in the random access process- A reference signal (Reference Signal, RS) is used to determine the default receive beam of the PDCCH.
2.针对接收PDCCH在RRC配置之后,但媒体接入控制(Medium Access  Control,MAC)控制单元(Control Element,CE)暂未激活PDCCH的TCI状态的情况,根据目前协议,终端设备可根据随机接入过程中的SSB/CSI-RS来确定PDCCH的默认接收波束。2. In view of the situation in which the PDCCH is received after the RRC configuration, but the Medium Access Control (MAC) control unit (Control Element, CE) has not activated the TCI state of the PDCCH for the time being, according to the current protocol, the terminal device can receive random access The SSB/CSI-RS in the incoming process is used to determine the default receive beam of the PDCCH.
在Rel-16中,PDSCH支持多传输接收点(Multiple Transmission and Reception Point,M-TRP)的空分复用(Space Division Multiplexing,SDM)1a的传输方式,即PDSCH所有的解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)端口被配置在两个码分复用(Code Division Multiplexing,CDM)组中,被指示包括两个TCI状态的TCI codepoint,第一个TCI状态与调度该PDSCH的DCI指示的天线端口中的第一个天线端口所对应的CDM组关联,第二个TCI状态与另外一个DMRS端口对应的CDM组关联。在Rel-16中,暂不支持PDCCH的M-TRP传输。In Rel-16, PDSCH supports the transmission mode of Space Division Multiplexing (SDM) 1a of Multiple Transmission and Reception Point (M-TRP), that is, all demodulation reference signals (Demodulation Reference Signals) of PDSCH. Reference Signal, DMRS) ports are configured in two code division multiplexing (Code Division Multiplexing, CDM) groups, and are indicated to include two TCI codepoints in TCI states, the first TCI state and the antenna indicated by the DCI scheduling the PDSCH The CDM group corresponding to the first antenna port in the ports is associated, and the second TCI state is associated with the CDM group corresponding to another DMRS port. In Rel-16, M-TRP transmission of PDCCH is not supported for the time being.
针对上述情况,在Rel-17中,拟增加新的M-TRP的PDCCH传输方案,即重复传输的PDCCH传输方案,其中两个重复传输的CORESET内的搜索空间(Search Space,SS)集合Set可以通过RRC配置进行关联配置,且包含两个SS set相互关联的两个CORESET传输相同的DCI。重复传输可以通过频分复用(Frequency Division Multiplex,FDM)或者通过时分复用(Time Division Multiple,TDM)传输相同的下行控制信息。In view of the above situation, in Rel-17, a new PDCCH transmission scheme of M-TRP is proposed to be added, that is, the PDCCH transmission scheme of repeated transmission, in which the search space (Search Space, SS) set Set in the CORESET of two repeated transmissions can be The association configuration is performed through RRC configuration, and two CORESETs that include two SS sets associated with each other transmit the same DCI. Repeated transmission can transmit the same downlink control information through frequency division multiplexing (Frequency Division Multiplex, FDM) or through time division multiplexing (Time Division Multiplex, TDM).
在Rel-17中,还提出了新的M-TRP的PDSCH/PDCCH单频网络(Single Frequency Network,SFN)传输方案,其中,PDSCH/PDCCH的数据层以及PDSCH/PDCCH的DMRS端口的信道与一个或多个QCL参考信号具有关于至少一个信道大尺度参数的QCL关系。因此,PDSCH/PDCCH的数据层以及PDSCH/PDCCH的DMRS端口来自于多个TRP的发送。In Rel-17, a new M-TRP PDSCH/PDCCH single frequency network (Single Frequency Network, SFN) transmission scheme is also proposed, in which the data layer of PDSCH/PDCCH and the channel of the DMRS port of PDSCH/PDCCH are associated with one The or more QCL reference signals have a QCL relationship with respect to at least one channel large-scale parameter. Therefore, the data layer of PDSCH/PDCCH and the DMRS port of PDSCH/PDCCH come from the transmission of multiple TRPs.
综上,针对PDSCH而言,当接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH(对应于SFN传输方式)的时间间隔小于门限(QCL持续时长)时,可根据终端设备接收的RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数(用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能)的情况进行区分:若RRC信令中不携带目标使能参数,则此时的接收波束只有一个TCI状态。那么当PDCCH为SFN传输时,PDCCH的lowest ID CORESET有2个TCI状态。因此按照现有规则无法确定PDSCH的默认接收波束,即PDSCH的TCI状态。若RRC信令中携带目标使能参数,则按照现有规则直接在MAC-CE激活后的lowest ID的codepoint中选择两个TCI状态, 而不是选择最优的TCI状态,因此无法准确的对PDSCH数据进行解调,性能大大降低。To sum up, for PDSCH, when the time interval between receiving DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH (corresponding to the SFN transmission mode) is less than the threshold (QCL duration), it can be used according to whether the RRC signaling received by the terminal device carries the target The enabling parameter (used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled) are distinguished: if the RRC signaling does not carry the target enabling parameter, the receive beam at this time has only one TCI state. Then when the PDCCH is SFN transmission, the lowest ID CORESET of the PDCCH has 2 TCI states. Therefore, the default receiving beam of the PDSCH, that is, the TCI state of the PDSCH cannot be determined according to the existing rules. If the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, according to the existing rules, two TCI states are directly selected in the codepoint of the lowest ID after MAC-CE activation, instead of selecting the optimal TCI state, so the PDSCH cannot be accurately identified. The data is demodulated, and the performance is greatly reduced.
针对PDCCH而言,根据目前结论,PDCCH拟通过RRC配置收到SFN传输方案,但若此时MAC-CE暂未激活PDCCH的TCI状态,基于现有的确定方式(采用随机接入过程中的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态时),只能确定一个TCI状态,而无法确定PDCCH的2个TCI状态。For the PDCCH, according to the current conclusion, the PDCCH intends to receive the SFN transmission scheme through the RRC configuration, but if the MAC-CE has not activated the TCI status of the PDCCH at this time, based on the existing determination method (using the SSB in the random access process) / CSI-RS TCI state), only one TCI state can be determined, but two TCI states of the PDCCH cannot be determined.
由此可见,在PDSCH支持SFN传输方式,PDCCH支持SFN传输方式或者非SFN传输方式的情况下,如何确定TCI状态成为急需解决的问题。It can be seen that in the case where the PDSCH supports the SFN transmission mode and the PDCCH supports the SFN transmission mode or the non-SFN transmission mode, how to determine the TCI state becomes an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本公开实施例提供一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法、装置及终端设备,以解决现有技术中在PDSCH支持SFN传输方式,PDCCH支持SFN传输方式或者非SFN传输方式的情况下,如何确定TCI状态的问题。The embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method, an apparatus, and a terminal device for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, so as to solve the problem in the prior art when the PDSCH supports the SFN transmission mode, and the PDCCH supports the SFN transmission mode or the non-SFN transmission mode. The question of TCI status.
第一方面,本公开实施例提供一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,应用于终端设备,包括:In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;Receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the target transmission mode corresponding to the downlink control channel PDCCH. The CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
在接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;Before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than the preset threshold, CORESET is selected according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter or not. Rules and TCI state selection rules to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至 少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
可选的,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;Optionally, the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values;
所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH includes:
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;When the PDSCH is in the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。In the case that the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,还包括:Optionally, after determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further includes:
在N大于或者等于2的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;When N is greater than or equal to 2, receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
在N的取值为1的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is 1, a default beam sent by the network device is received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态,包括:Optionally, the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH includes:
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration The TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration The corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
可选的,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对 应的TCI状态之后,还包括:Optionally, after the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH is determined according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the method further includes:
在所述PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;In the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, receiving a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, one or two default beams sent by the network device are received through the corresponding TCI state.
可选的,所述根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:Optionally, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, including:
在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;Determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;After the K CORESETs are determined, L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在所述RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
可选的,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SS Set与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;Optionally, the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
所述根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,包括:The L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, including:
检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;Detecting whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;In the presence of the first CORESET, determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;In the absence of the first CORESET, detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs;
在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态;In the presence of two of the second CORESETs, determining that the two second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;In the case where there are no two second CORESETs, it is detected whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs, the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. The SS Set in the fourth CORESET forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态。In the presence of the third CORESET, it is determined that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
可选的,所述根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:Optionally, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, including:
根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下;Optionally, in the case that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET;
所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;Optionally, in the case that two of the second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs;
所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,在所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;Optionally, in the case that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs;
所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,所述根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:Optionally, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, including:
在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;In the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle The target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,包括;Optionally, selecting a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, including;
将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
可选的,在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,还包括:Optionally, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further includes:
通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者Receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval by using the determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。The two default beams sent by the network device are respectively received within the time interval by using the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
第二方面,本公开实施例还提供一种终端设备,包括存储器,收发机,处理器;In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal device, including a memory, a transceiver, and a processor;
所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序;所述收发机,用于在所述处理器的控制下收发数据;所述处理器,用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行以下操作:The memory is used to store a computer program; the transceiver is used to send and receive data under the control of the processor; the processor is used to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:
控制所述收发机接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;Control the transceiver to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH. Target transmission mode, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
在所述收发机接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;Before the transceiver receives the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, the transceiver determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the corresponding SFN transmission mode of the PDSCH. The target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在所述收发机接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the transceiver receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the transceiver is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter situation, CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
可选的,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;When the PDSCH is in the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。In the case that the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, after determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
在N大于或者等于2的情况下,控制所述收发机通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;When N is greater than or equal to 2, controlling the transceiver to receive the two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
在N的取值为1的情况下,控制所述收发机通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is 1, the transceiver is controlled to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration The TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration The corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
可选的,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, after the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH is determined according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,控制所述收发机通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;In the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, controlling the transceiver to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,控制所述收发机通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, the transceiver is controlled to receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI state.
可选的,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;Determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;After the K CORESETs are determined, L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在所述RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状 态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
可选的,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SS Set与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;Optionally, the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;Detecting whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;In the presence of the first CORESET, determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;In the absence of the first CORESET, detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs;
在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态;In the presence of two of the second CORESETs, determining that the two second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;In the case where there are no two second CORESETs, it is detected whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs, the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. The SS Set in the fourth CORESET forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态。In the presence of the third CORESET, it is determined that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
可选的,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下;Optionally, in the case that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET;
所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;Optionally, in the case that two of the second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs;
所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,在所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;Optionally, in the case that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs;
所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;In the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle The target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
可选的,在所述收发机接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且所述处理器确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, after the transceiver receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the processor determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
控制所述收发机通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者Controlling the transceiver to receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval through a determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
控制所述收发机通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。The transceiver is controlled to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval through the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
第三方面,本公开实施例还提供一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定装置,应用于终端设备,包括:In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an apparatus for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
第一接收模块,用于接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;The first receiving module is used to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH The corresponding target transmission mode, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
第一确定模块,用于在接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;The first determining module is configured to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, and according to the The target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
第二确定模块,用于在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;The second determination module is configured to, when the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target command The condition of the parameters, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
第四方面,本公开实施例提供了一种处理器可读存储介质,该处理器可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如上第一方面所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a processor-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the processor-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the transmission described in the first aspect above is implemented Configure the determination method to indicate the TCI status.
第五方面,本公开实施例提供了一种计算机程序,包括计算机可读代码,当所述计算机可读代码在计算处理设备上运行时,导致所述计算处理设备执行上述第一方面所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a computer program, including computer-readable codes, which, when the computer-readable codes are executed on a computing and processing device, cause the computing and processing device to execute the above-mentioned first aspect. The transport configuration indicates the method for determining the TCI status.
第六方面,本公开实施例提供了一种计算机可读介质,其中存储了如上述第五方面所述的计算机程序。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present disclosure provides a computer-readable medium, in which the computer program described in the fifth aspect is stored.
在本公开实施例中,在PDSCH为SFN传输时,在接收MAC-CE的激活 信息之前,可根据PDSCH配置确定PDSCH的TCI状态、根据PDCCH的不同传输方式来确定PDCCH的TCI状态,在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,可动态根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数的情况来确定PDSCH的TCI状态,从而保证PDSCH和PDCCH数据的正确接收。In the embodiment of the present disclosure, when the PDSCH is SFN transmission, before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI status of the PDSCH can be determined according to the PDSCH configuration, and the TCI status of the PDCCH can be determined according to different transmission modes of the PDCCH. - After the activation information of the CE, the TCI state of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of the PDSCH and PDCCH data.
上述说明仅是本公开技术方案的概述,为了能够更清楚了解本公开的技术手段,而可依照说明书的内容予以实施,并且为了让本公开的上述和其它目的、特征和优点能够更明显易懂,以下特举本公开的具体实施方式。The above description is only an overview of the technical solutions of the present disclosure. In order to understand the technical means of the present disclosure more clearly, it can be implemented according to the contents of the description, and in order to make the above-mentioned and other purposes, features and advantages of the present disclosure more obvious and easy to understand , the following specific embodiments of the present disclosure are given.
附图说明Description of drawings
为了更清楚地说明本公开实施例或相关技术中的技术方案,下面将对本公开实施例或相关技术描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图是本公开的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present disclosure or related technologies more clearly, the following briefly introduces the accompanying drawings that need to be used in the descriptions of the embodiments of the present disclosure or related technologies. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are the For the disclosed embodiments, for those of ordinary skill in the art, other drawings can also be obtained from these drawings without any creative effort.
图1表示本公开实施例传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法示意图;FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2a表示本公开实施例目标BWP内对应的CORESET的示意图一;Fig. 2a shows the schematic diagram 1 of the corresponding CORESET in the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图2b表示本公开实施例目标BWP内对应的CORESET的示意图二;Fig. 2b shows the second schematic diagram of the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图3表示本公开实施例目标BWP内对应的CORESET同一时刻形成SS Set关联的示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing that the corresponding CORESETs in the target BWP of the embodiment of the present disclosure form SS Set associations at the same time;
图4表示本公开实施例目标BWP内对应的CORESET不同时刻形成SS Set关联的示意图之一;FIG. 4 shows one of the schematic diagrams of forming SS Set associations at different times between the corresponding CORESETs in the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图5表示本公开实施例目标BWP内对应的CORESET不同时刻形成SS Set关联的示意图之二;FIG. 5 shows the second schematic diagram of the formation of SS Set associations between the corresponding CORESETs in the target BWP of the embodiment of the present disclosure at different times;
图6表示本公开实施例目标BWP内对应的CORESET不同时刻以及同一时刻形成SS Set关联的示意图;Fig. 6 shows the schematic diagram of forming SS Set associations at different times and at the same time corresponding to CORESETs in the target BWP according to the embodiment of the present disclosure;
图7表示本公开实施例传输配置指示TCI状态的确定装置示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图8表示本公开实施例终端设备的结构框图;FIG. 8 shows a structural block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图9示意性地示出了用于执行根据本公开的方法的计算处理设备的框图;Figure 9 schematically shows a block diagram of a computing processing device for performing methods according to the present disclosure;
图10示意性地示出了用于保持或者携带实现根据本公开的方法的程序代码的存储单元。Figure 10 schematically shows a memory unit for holding or carrying program code implementing the method according to the present disclosure.
具体实施例specific embodiment
为使本公开实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合本公 开实施例中的附图,对本公开实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本公开一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本公开中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本公开保护的范围。In order to make the purposes, technical solutions and advantages of the embodiments of the present disclosure clearer, the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present disclosure will be described clearly and completely below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Obviously, the described embodiments These are some, but not all, embodiments of the present disclosure. Based on the embodiments in the present disclosure, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present disclosure.
本公开实施例中术语“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。In the embodiments of the present disclosure, the term "and/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, and indicates that there can be three kinds of relationships. For example, A and/or B can indicate that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone these three situations. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship.
本公开实施例中术语“多个”是指两个或两个以上,其它量词与之类似。In the embodiments of the present disclosure, the term "plurality" refers to two or more than two, and other quantifiers are similar.
下面将结合本公开实施例中的附图,对本公开实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本公开一部分实施例,并不是全部的实施例。基于本公开中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本公开保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present disclosure will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present disclosure. Obviously, the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present disclosure, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present disclosure, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present disclosure.
本公开实施例提供了一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法及装置,用以实现在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,根据PDSCH的SFN传输方式确定PDSCH的TCI状态、根据PDCCH的目标传输方式来确定PDCCH的TCI状态,在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,可动态根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数的情况来确定PDSCH的TCI状态,从而保证PDSCH和PDCCH数据的正确接收。Embodiments of the present disclosure provide a method and apparatus for determining the TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, so as to realize the determination of the TCI state of the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode of the PDSCH and the target transmission mode of the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE To determine the TCI status of the PDCCH, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI status of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of PDSCH and PDCCH data.
其中,方法和装置是基于同一申请构思的,由于方法和装置解决问题的原理相似,因此装置和方法的实施可以相互参见,重复之处不再赘述。The method and the device are conceived based on the same application. Since the principles of the method and the device for solving the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and repeated descriptions will not be repeated here.
此外,本公开实施例提供的技术方案可以适用于多种系统,尤其是5G系统。例如适用的系统可以是全球移动通讯(global system of mobile communication,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)系统、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)系统、高级长期演进(long term evolution advanced,LTE-A)系统、通用移动系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide  interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)系统、5G新无线(New Radio,NR)系统等。这多种系统中均包括终端设备和网络设备。系统中还可以包括核心网部分,例如演进的分组系统(Evloved Packet System,EPS)、5G系统(5GS)等。In addition, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure can be applied to various systems, especially 5G systems. For example, the applicable system may be a global system of mobile communication (GSM) system, a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, a wideband code division multiple access (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, WCDMA) general packet Wireless service (general packet radio service, GPRS) system, long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD) system, Long term evolution advanced (LTE-A) system, universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) system, 5G New Radio (New Radio, NR) system, etc. These various systems include terminal equipment and network equipment. The system may also include a core network part, such as an evolved packet system (Evloved Packet System, EPS), a 5G system (5GS), and the like.
本公开实施例涉及的终端设备,可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备等。在不同的系统中,用户设备的名称可能也不相同,例如在5G系统中,终端设备可以称为用户设备。无线终端设备可以经无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)与一个或多个核心网(Core Network,CN)进行通信,无线终端设备可以是移动终端设备,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)和具有移动终端设备的计算机,例如,可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如,个人通信业务(Personal Communication Service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(Session Initiated Protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)等设备。无线终端设备也可以称为系统、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point)、远程终端设备(remote terminal)、接入终端设备(access terminal)、用户终端设备(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户装置(user device),本公开实施例中并不限定。The terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem. In different systems, the name of the user equipment may be different. For example, in the 5G system, the terminal equipment may be called user equipment. Wireless terminal equipment can communicate with one or more core networks (Core Network, CN) via a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN). "telephone) and computers with mobile terminal equipment, eg portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, computer-built or vehicle-mounted mobile devices, which exchange language and/or data with the radio access network. For example, Personal Communication Service (PCS) phones, cordless phones, Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) phones, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) stations, Personal Digital Assistants (Personal Digital Assistants), PDA) and other devices. Wireless terminal equipment may also be referred to as system, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, access point , a remote terminal device (remote terminal), an access terminal device (access terminal), a user terminal device (user terminal), a user agent (user agent), and a user device (user device), which are not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure.
本公开实施例涉及的网络设备,可以是基站,该基站可以包括多个为终端提供服务的小区。根据具体应用场合不同,基站又可以称为接入点,或者可以是接入网中在空中接口上通过一个或多个扇区与无线终端设备通信的设备,或者其它名称。网络设备可用于将收到的空中帧与网际协议(Internet Protocol,IP)分组进行相互更换,作为无线终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器,其中接入网的其余部分可包括网际协议(IP)通信网络。网络设备还可协调对空中接口的属性管理。例如,本公开实施例涉及的网络设备可以是全球移动通信系统(Global System for Mobile communications,GSM)或码分多址接入(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)中的网络设备(Base Transceiver Station,BTS),也可以是带宽码分多址接入(Wide-band Code  Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)中的网络设备(NodeB),还可以是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型网络设备(evolutional Node B,eNB或e-NodeB)、5G网络架构(next generation system)中的5G基站(gNB),也可以是家庭演进基站(Home evolved Node B,HeNB)、中继节点(relay node)、家庭基站(femto)、微微基站(pico)等,本公开实施例中并不限定。在一些网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点,集中单元和分布单元也可以地理上分开布置。The network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a base station, and the base station may include a plurality of cells providing services for the terminal. Depending on the specific application, the base station may also be called an access point, or may be a device in the access network that communicates with wireless terminal equipment through one or more sectors on the air interface, or other names. The network device can be used to exchange received air frames with Internet Protocol (IP) packets, and act as a router between the wireless terminal device and the rest of the access network, which can include the Internet. Protocol (IP) communication network. The network devices may also coordinate attribute management for the air interface. For example, the network device involved in the embodiments of the present disclosure may be a network device (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) in the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) or Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division Multiple Access, CDMA). ), it can also be a network device (NodeB) in Wide-band Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), or it can be an evolved network device in a long term evolution (LTE) system (evolutional Node B, eNB or e-NodeB), 5G base station (gNB) in 5G network architecture (next generation system), or Home evolved Node B (HeNB), relay node (relay node) , a home base station (femto), a pico base station (pico), etc., which are not limited in the embodiments of the present disclosure. In some network structures, a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node and a distributed unit (DU) node, and the centralized unit and the distributed unit may also be geographically separated.
网络设备与终端设备之间可以各自使用一或多根天线进行多输入多输出(Multi Input Multi Output,MIMO)传输,MIMO传输可以是单用户MIMO(Single User MIMO,SU-MIMO)或多用户MIMO(Multiple User MIMO,MU-MIMO)。根据根天线组合的形态和数量,MIMO传输可以是2D-MIMO、3D-MIMO、FD-MIMO或massive-MIMO,也可以是分集传输或预编码传输或波束赋形传输等。One or more antennas can be used between the network device and the terminal device for multi-input multi-output (MIMO) transmission. The MIMO transmission can be single-user MIMO (Single User MIMO, SU-MIMO) or multi-user MIMO. (Multiple User MIMO, MU-MIMO). According to the form and number of root antenna combinations, MIMO transmission can be 2D-MIMO, 3D-MIMO, FD-MIMO, or massive-MIMO, or diversity transmission, precoding transmission, or beamforming transmission.
下面对本公开实施例提供的应用于终端设备的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法进行介绍,参见图1所示,该方法包括:The following describes a method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication applied to a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 1 , the method includes:
步骤101、接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数。Step 101: Receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the target transmission corresponding to the downlink control channel PDCCH. The CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128.
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中RRC信令中携带M(M为正整数,最小取值为1)个CORESET配置(某一时刻对应的配置)、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式以及PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,PDCCH对应的目标传输方式可以为SFN传输或者非SFN传输。针对每个CORESET配置而言,可以包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,N的取值范围为1至128(即N最小为1、最大为128),不同的CORESET配置,其对应的N的取值可以不同。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M (M is a positive integer, the minimum value is 1) CORESET configurations (configurations corresponding to a certain moment), the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and the PDCCH. The corresponding target transmission mode, the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH may be SFN transmission or non-SFN transmission. For each CORESET configuration, it can include the time-frequency resource location and N TCI state index values. The value of N can be different.
步骤102、在接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH 对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态。Step 102: Before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH. The target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
终端设备在接收到网络设备发送的MAC-CE的激活信息之前,可以根据RRC信令中携带的PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态,根据RRC信令中携带的PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态。其中,PDCCH对应的目标传输方式可以为SFN传输或者非SFN传输,针对不同的传输方式,确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态的方式也有所区别。Before receiving the MAC-CE activation information sent by the network device, the terminal device can determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH carried in the RRC signaling, and according to the target transmission corresponding to the PDCCH carried in the RRC signaling. way to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH. The target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH may be SFN transmission or non-SFN transmission, and for different transmission modes, the methods for determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH are also different.
步骤103、在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Step 103: When the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter. , CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
终端设备在接收RRC信令之后,可以根据CORESET配置中的时频资源位置,确定对应的CORESET,即,可以根据M个时频资源位置确定对应的M个CORESET。由于CORESET配置中包括N个TCI状态索引值,每一个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,因此针对每个CORESET,可包括至少一个TCI状态。After receiving the RRC signaling, the terminal device may determine the corresponding CORESETs according to the time-frequency resource positions in the CORESET configuration, that is, may determine the corresponding M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions. Since the CORESET configuration includes N TCI state index values, and each TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, each CORESET may include at least one TCI state.
在接收到MAC-CE的激活信息且接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限(准共址持续时长)时,可以根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。即,终端设备接收到目标使能参数时与未接收到目标使能参数时,确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的方式也有所区别,在根据CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以首先根据CORESET选择规则确定CORESET,然后根据TCI状态选择规则确定TCI状态。When the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold (quasi-co-location duration), it can be determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, CORESET selection rule and The TCI state selection rule determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. That is, when the terminal device receives the target enable parameter and when it does not receive the target enable parameter, the method of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is also different. When determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule , the CORESET may be first determined according to the CORESET selection rule, and then the TCI state may be determined according to the TCI state selection rule.
本公开上述实施过程,在PDSCH为SFN传输时,在接收MAC-CE的激 活信息之前,可根据PDSCH配置确定PDSCH的TCI状态、根据PDCCH的不同传输方式来确定PDCCH的TCI状态,在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,可动态根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数的情况来确定PDSCH的TCI状态,从而保证PDSCH和PDCCH数据的正确接收。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, when the PDSCH is SFN transmission, before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI status of the PDSCH can be determined according to the PDSCH configuration, and the TCI status of the PDCCH can be determined according to different transmission modes of the PDCCH. After the activation information of the CE, the TCI state of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of the PDSCH and PDCCH data.
下面对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的情况进行介绍,在本实施例中,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;The following describes the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE. In this embodiment, the RRC signaling also carries the PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state indexes value;
所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH includes:
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;When the PDSCH is in the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。In the case that the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
本实施例中,RRC信令中还携带有PDSCH配置,PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N的取值范围为1至128。在根据PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以针对N的不同取值采用不同的方案。In this embodiment, the RRC signaling also carries the PDSCH configuration, where the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, and the value of N ranges from 1 to 128. When determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, different schemes may be adopted for different values of N.
在PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,可以针对N个TCI状态索引值,将前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。在PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,可以将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态,即,此时仅确定一个TCI状态。When the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values may be determined as the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH for the N TCI state index values. When the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access can be determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, that is, only one TCI state is determined at this time .
在根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,该方法还包括:After determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further includes:
在N大于或者等于2的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;When N is greater than or equal to 2, receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
在N的取值为1的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is 1, a default beam sent by the network device is received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
在确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,可以根据确定的TCI状态,接收网络设备发送的默认波束。由于在PDSCH对应于SFN传输且终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,根据PDSCH配置中N的不同取值可以确定PDSCH对应的一个或者两个TCI状态,因此可以针对N的不同取值,对接收默认波束的情况进行区分。After the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined, the default beam sent by the network device may be received according to the determined TCI state. Because before the PDSCH corresponds to SFN transmission and the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, one or two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined according to the different values of N in the PDSCH configuration. The case of receiving the default beam is distinguished.
在N的取值大于或者等于2时,由于可以确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态,因此可以通过PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收网络设备发送的两个默认波束;在N的取值为1的情况下,由于可以确定PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态,因此可以通过PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is greater than or equal to 2, since the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined, the two default beams sent by the network device can be respectively received through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH; the value of N is 1 In the case of , since a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined, a default beam sent by the network device can be received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
本公开上述实施例为在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态以及接收网络设备发送的默认波束的实施过程,通过根据PDSCH配置中N的不同取值采用对应的方式确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态,进而采用确定的TCI状态接收网络设备发送的默认波束,可以保证PDSCH数据的正确接收。The above embodiment of the present disclosure is an implementation process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and receiving the default beam sent by the network device before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE. The PDSCH is determined in a corresponding manner according to different values of N in the PDSCH configuration. The corresponding TCI state, and then adopting the determined TCI state to receive the default beam sent by the network device can ensure correct reception of PDSCH data.
下面对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态的情况进行介绍,在本实施例中,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The following describes the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE. In this embodiment, the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH includes: :
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration The TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration The corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,根据PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态时,可以首先确定PDCCH对应的目标传输方式是 否为SFN传输方式,若PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输,则可以直接将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, when determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, you can first determine whether the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, if the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is non-SFN transmission, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access may be directly determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
若PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输,针对M个CORESET配置,确定包括一个TCI状态索引值的CORESET配置、确定包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的CORESET配置,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,可以将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括M个CORESET中每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。If the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is SFN transmission, for M CORESET configurations, a CORESET configuration including one TCI state index value is determined, and a CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values is determined. For each CORESET configuration, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access can be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration. For each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, set the The TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration respectively are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration. For the PDCCH, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET in the M CORESETs.
所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,该方法还包括:After the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH is determined according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the method further includes:
在所述PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;In the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, receiving a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, one or two default beams sent by the network device are received through the corresponding TCI state.
在确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,可以根据确定的TCI状态,接收网络设备发送的默认波束。由于终端设备在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,根据PDCCH对应的不同传输方式所确定的TCI状态情况不同,因此需要根据PDCCH对应的不同传输方式对接收默认波束的情况进行区分。After the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH is determined, the default beam sent by the network device may be received according to the determined TCI state. Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states determined according to the different transmission modes corresponding to the PDCCH are different, so it is necessary to distinguish the reception default beam according to the different transmission modes corresponding to the PDCCH.
在PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,可以通过PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收网络设备发送的一个默认波束;在PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,由于每个CORESET可对应于一个或者两个TCI状态,针对每个CORESET,通过对应的TCI状态接收网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, a default beam sent by the network device can be received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH; when the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, each CORESET can correspond to one or two TCIs Status, for each CORESET, receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI status.
本公开上述实施例为在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态以及接收网络设备发送的默认波束的实施过程,根据PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定PDCCH对应的TCI状态,进而采用确定的TCI状态接收网络设备发送的默认波束,可以保证PDCCH数据的正确接收。The above embodiment of the present disclosure is an implementation process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH and receiving the default beam sent by the network device before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, and then using The determined TCI state receives the default beam sent by the network device, which can ensure correct reception of PDCCH data.
下面对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的情况进行介绍。在本实施例中,所述根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The following describes the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE. In this embodiment, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, includes:
在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;Determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;After the K CORESETs are determined, L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在所述RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数的情况(即RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数)、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以根据终端设备对应的目标BWP,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的K个CORESET,其中,由于1个BWP最多对应于3个CORESET,因此K的最大取值为3,由于M的最小取值为1,因此K的最小取值为1。其中,在MAC-CE激活之后,即,接收到MAC-CE的激活信息之后,每个CORESET至多可包括两个TCI状态。After receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, determine the TCI corresponding to PDSCH according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter (that is, whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter), the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule In the state, the K CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP can be determined from the M CORESETs according to the target BWP corresponding to the terminal device. Among them, since 1 BWP corresponds to 3 CORESETs at most, the maximum value of K is 3. Since M The minimum value of 1 is 1, so the minimum value of K is 1. Wherein, after the activation of the MAC-CE, that is, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, each CORESET may include at most two TCI states.
在M个CORESET中确定K个CORESET之后,可以根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数,即可以确定至少一个参考CORESET、最多3个参考CORESET。After K CORESETs are determined from the M CORESETs, L reference CORESETs may be determined according to a preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K, at least one reference CORESET and at most 3 reference CORESETs may be determined.
在确定L个参考CORESET之后,可以根据RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况,采用不同的策略,在L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。即,在RRC信令中不携带目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在L个参考 CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态;在RRC信令中携带目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。After the L reference CORESETs are determined, different strategies may be adopted to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter. That is, when the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs; in the RRC signaling When the target enabling parameter is carried in the TCI, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule.
本公开上述过程,通过在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的K个CORESET,基于预设策略筛选出L个参考CORESET,根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数的情况,采用不同的策略,在L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态,可以保证PDSCH数据的正确接收。In the above process of the present disclosure, by determining K CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs, filtering out L reference CORESETs based on a preset strategy, and adopting different strategies according to whether the terminal device receives the target enabling parameters Determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the L reference TCI states corresponding to the CORESET can ensure correct reception of the PDSCH data.
下面对根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET的情况进行介绍。在本实施例中,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SSSet与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;The following describes the case where L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy. In this embodiment, the CORESET configuration further includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SSSet in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
所述根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,包括:The L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, including:
检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;Detecting whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;In the presence of the first CORESET, determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;In the absence of the first CORESET, detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs;
在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态,且两个第二CORESET包括不同的TCI状态;In the case where there are two second CORESETs, it is determined that the two second CORESETs are the two reference CORESETs, the second CORESETs include one TCI state, and the two second CORESETs include different TCI states ;
在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;In the case where there are no two second CORESETs, it is detected whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs, the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. The SS Set in the fourth CORESET forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态,且第三CORESET和第四CORESET包括不同的TCI状态。In the presence of the third CORESET, it is determined that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET each include one TCI state, and the third CORESET The third CORESET and the fourth CORESET include different TCI states.
针对每个CORESET配置而言,还可以包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内SS Set与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联。For each CORESET configuration, the CORESET index value and the association between the SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs may also be included.
在确定L个参考CORESET时,可以按照如下检测次序进行检测以确定L个参考CORESET:首先检测K个CORESET中是否存在包括两个TCI状态的第一CORESET,若存在,将第一CORESET确定为参考CORESET,此时,第一CORESET的数量最小为1、最大为K,即参考CORESET的取值最小为1、最大为K。When the L reference CORESETs are determined, the following detection sequence may be performed to determine the L reference CORESETs: first, check whether there is a first CORESET including two TCI states in the K CORESETs, and if so, determine the first CORESET as a reference CORESET, at this time, the minimum number of the first CORESET is 1 and the maximum is K, that is, the minimum value of the reference CORESET is 1 and the maximum is K.
若不存在,则检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET,若存在,则将第二CORESET确定为参考CORESET,此时,第二CORESET的数量为2,即参考CORESET的取值为2,每一个第二CORESET均包括一个TCI状态,且两个第二CORESET对应于不同的TCI状态。If it does not exist, it is detected whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same time in the K CORESETs. If there are, the second CORESET is determined as the reference CORESET. At this time, the number of the second CORESET is 2, that is, With reference to the value of the CORESET being 2, each second CORESET includes one TCI state, and the two second CORESETs correspond to different TCI states.
若不存在,则在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,第三CORESET内SS Set与目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数,且P与K的值可以相等或者不等。若存在,则将第三CORESET和第四CORESET确定为两个参考CORESET,即,参考CORESET的数量为两个。其中,第三CORESET和第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态,且第三CORESET和第四CORESET对应于不同的TCI状态。即,形成SS Set关联的两个CORESET对应于不同的TCI状态。If it does not exist, check whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs. The SS Set in the third CORESET forms an association with the SS Set in the fourth CORESET in the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and P is greater than or An integer equal to 1, less than or equal to 3, and the values of P and K may be equal or unequal. If present, the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are determined to be two reference CORESETs, that is, the number of reference CORESETs is two. Wherein, both the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET include one TCI state, and the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET correspond to different TCI states. That is, the two CORESETs that form an SS Set association correspond to different TCI states.
上述流程为首先检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,若不存在,检测K个CORESET中是否存在两个第二CORESET,若不存在,检测K个CORESET中是否存在第三CORESET。通过上述检测可以确定L个参考CORESET,在K个CORESET中存在第一CORESET时,参考CORESET数量的取值为1至K,在K个CORESET中不存在第一CORESET、存在第二CORESET时,参考CORESET数量的取值为2,在K个CORESET中不存在第一CORESET和第二CORESET、存在第三CORESET的情况下,参考CORESET数量的取值为2。本实施例中,第一CORESET、第二CORESET和第三CORESET的优先级依次降低。The above process is to first detect whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, if not, detect whether there are two second CORESETs in the K CORESETs, if not, detect whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs. Through the above detection, L reference CORESETs can be determined. When the first CORESET exists in the K CORESETs, the number of reference CORESETs ranges from 1 to K. When the first CORESET does not exist and the second CORESET exists in the K CORESETs, the reference The value of the number of CORESETs is 2, and in the case that the first CORESET and the second CORESET do not exist in the K CORESETs, and the third CORESET exists, the value of the reference CORESET number is 2. In this embodiment, the priorities of the first CORESET, the second CORESET and the third CORESET are sequentially decreased.
本公开上述实施过程,通过按照特定顺序依次进行检测,可以优先将第一CORESET确定为参考CORESET,在K个CORESET中不存在第一CORESET时,可以将第二CORESET确定为参考CORESET,在K个CORESET 中不存在第二CORESET时,可以将第三CORESET以及第四CORESET确定为参考CORESET,实现按照优先级确定参考CORESET。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, by performing detection in a specific order, the first CORESET can be preferentially determined as the reference CORESET, and when the first CORESET does not exist in the K CORESETs, the second CORESET can be determined as the reference CORESET. When the second CORESET does not exist in the CORESET, the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET may be determined as the reference CORESET, so that the reference CORESET is determined according to the priority.
下面针对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,终端设备在时间间隔内支持一个默认PDSCH接收波束的情况,对确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程进行阐述。在本实施例中,所述根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The following describes the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH in the case where the terminal device supports a default PDSCH receiving beam within a time interval after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE. In this embodiment, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule includes:
根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
由于每个CORESET配置还可以包括CORESET索引值,在根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以首先根据每个参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,然后针对第一目标CORESET,在第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。即,首先基于CORESET索引值进行CORESET筛选,然后针对筛选出的CORESET,根据CORESET对应的TCI状态确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Since each CORESET configuration may further include a CORESET index value, when determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, you can first determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to each Referring to the CORESET index values corresponding to the CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and then for the first target CORESET, a TCI state is selected in the first target CORESET to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. That is, the CORESET is first filtered based on the CORESET index value, and then, for the filtered CORESET, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined according to the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET.
本公开上述实施过程,通过基于CORESET索引值在L个参考CORESET中进行筛选,可以准确的确定出第一目标CORESET,进而可以在第一目标CORESET的基础上快速确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, the first target CORESET can be accurately determined by screening the L reference CORESETs based on the CORESET index value, and then the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be quickly determined on the basis of the first target CORESET.
其中,由于参考CORESET可以为第一CORESET、参考CORESET还可以为第二CORESET,参考CORESET也可以为第三CORESET和第四CORESET,针对参考CORESET的不同情况,其确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的方式有所区别,下面针对参考CORESET为不同CORESET的情况,对确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程分别进行介绍。Among them, since the reference CORESET may be the first CORESET, the reference CORESET may also be the second CORESET, and the reference CORESET may also be the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, for different situations of the reference CORESET, the way to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is as follows: The following describes the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH for the case where the reference CORESET is a different CORESET.
在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下,所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:In the case that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, selecting a first target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and selecting a first target CORESET in the reference CORESET. In the first target CORESET, a TCI state is selected and determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, including:
将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
若第一CORESET为参考CORESET,在确定第一目标CORESET并确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以针对L个参考CORESET,根据CORESET索引值,在L个参考CORESET中,选择出最低CORESET索引值对应的第一CORESET,将选择出的第一CORESET确定为第一目标CORESET。由于第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态,在确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以将第一目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态中的任意一个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态,即,将第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态(TCI状态索引值相对靠前的TCI状态)确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态,或者,将第一目标CORESET中的第二个TCI状态(TCI状态索引值相对靠后的TCI状态)确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。If the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, when the first target CORESET is determined and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined, for the L reference CORESETs, according to the CORESET index value, among the L reference CORESETs, the one corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value may be selected. For the first CORESET, the selected first CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET. Since the first CORESET includes two TCI states, when determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, any one of the two TCI states in the first target CORESET may be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, that is, the first The first TCI state in the target CORESET (the TCI state with a relatively high TCI state index value) is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET (the TCI state index value is relatively high) is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. The subsequent TCI state) is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
下面针对终端设备未接收到目标使能参数(RRC信令中不携带目标使能参数)的情况,通过具体实例对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前确定PDSCH以及PDCCH对应的TCI状态、接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程进行阐述。In the following, for the case where the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter), a specific example is used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, receive the MAC-CE The process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的SFN传输方式以及PDSCH配置。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, wherein the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个(取值为2至128)TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N (values 2 to 128) TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states. For the PDCCH, for each CORESET configuration including one TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration. For each CORESET configuration of the two TCI state index values, determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的3个CORESET。参见图2a所示,在3个CORESET中(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)均包括两个TCI状态时,选择CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#0),将选中的CORESET中的第一个TCI状态(TCI状态#0)或者第二个TCI状态(TCI状态#1)确定为PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。或者,参见图2b所示,在3个CORESET中(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2),仅CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#0)包括两个TCI状态,其余CORESET(CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)均包括一个TCI状态,则将包括两个TCI状态的CORESET#0确定为第一目标CORESET,将CORESET#0中的第一个TCI状态(TCI状态#0)或者第二个TCI状态(TCI状态#1)确定为PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。当然3个CORESET中对应的TCI状态还可以是其他情况,这里不再一一列举阐述。在第一CORESET为参考CORESET时,确定PDCCH、PDSCH对应的TCI状态还可以有其他实施情况,这里不再列举。After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to Figure 2a, when the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) all include two TCI states, select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value, and place the selected CORESET in the The first TCI state (TCI state #0) or the second TCI state (TCI state #1) is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. Or, as shown in Figure 2b, among the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2), only the CORESET with the lowest CORESET index value (CORESET#0) includes two TCI states, and the remaining CORESETs (CORESET# 1 and CORESET#2) both include one TCI state, then the CORESET#0 including two TCI states is determined as the first target CORESET, and the first TCI state (TCI state #0) or the second target CORESET in CORESET#0 is determined. One TCI state (TCI state #1) is determined as one TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. Of course, the corresponding TCI states in the three CORESETs may also be other situations, which will not be listed and described here. When the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, there may be other implementation situations for determining the TCI states corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH, which are not listed here.
本公开上述实施过程,通过在L个第一CORESET中选择索引值最低的第一CORESET为第一目标CORESET,可以实现基于最低索引值原则确定第一目标CORESET,通过将第一目标CORESET中的任意一个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态,可以保证TCI状态的可选性。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, by selecting the first CORESET with the lowest index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET, the first target CORESET can be determined based on the principle of the lowest index value. A TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, which can ensure the optionality of the TCI state.
在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下,所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:In the case where the two second CORESETs are the two reference CORESETs, selecting a first target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index values corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, And select a TCI state in the first target CORESET to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, including:
将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
若第二CORESET为参考CORESET,在确定第一目标CORESET并确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以针对两个参考CORESET,根据CORESET索引值,在两个参考CORESET中,选择出最低CORESET索引值对应的第二CORESET,将选择出的第二CORESET确定为第一目标CORESET。由于第 一目标CORESET包括一个TCI状态,可以将第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。If the second CORESET is the reference CORESET, when the first target CORESET is determined and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined, for the two reference CORESETs, according to the CORESET index value, among the two reference CORESETs, the one corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value may be selected. For the second CORESET, the selected second CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET. Since the first target CORESET includes one TCI state, the TCI state in the first target CORESET may be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
下面针对终端设备未接收到目标使能参数(RRC信令中不携带目标使能参数)的情况,通过具体实例对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前确定PDSCH以及PDCCH对应的TCI状态、接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程进行阐述。In the following, for the case where the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter), a specific example is used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, receive the MAC-CE The process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的非SFN传输方式以及PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为大于或者等于2、小于或者等于128的整数)。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128).
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. For the PDCCH, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的3个CORESET。参见图3所示,在3个CORESET中(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)均包括1个TCI状态时,由于CORESET#0内SS set与CORESET#1内SS set为关联状态,因此终端设备可以认为这两个CORESET为不同的TRP频分复用发送的,因此终端设备可选中相互关联的两个CORESET中CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#0),然后将选中的CORESET中的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。当然3个CORESET内的SS set关联还可以是其他情况,这里不再一一列举阐述。在第二CORESET为参考CORESET时,确定PDCCH、PDSCH对应的TCI状态还可以有其他实施情况,这里不再列举。After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to Figure 3, when three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2) all include one TCI state, since the SS set in CORESET#0 and the SS set in CORESET#1 are associated states, Therefore, the terminal device can think that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRP frequency division multiplexing, so the terminal device can select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value among the two correlated CORESETs, and then select the CORESET in the selected CORESET The TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. Of course, the SS set associations in the three CORESETs can also be other situations, which are not listed here. When the second CORESET is the reference CORESET, there may be other implementation situations for determining the TCI states corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH, which are not listed here.
本公开上述实施过程,通过在两个第二CORESET中选择索引值最低的第二CORESET为第一目标CORESET,可以实现基于最低索引值原则在同一时刻SS Set关联的两个第二CORESET中确定第一目标CORESET,通过将第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态,可以保证TCI状态确定的快捷性。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, by selecting the second CORESET with the lowest index value among the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, it is possible to determine the first target CORESET based on the principle of the lowest index value in the two second CORESETs associated with the SS Set at the same time. For a target CORESET, by determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the quickness of the determination of the TCI state can be ensured.
在第三CORESET和第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下,所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:In the case that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, selecting a first target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index values corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, And select a TCI state in the first target CORESET to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, including:
将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
若第三CORESET和第四CORESET为参考CORESET,在确定第一目标CORESET并确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,可以针对两个参考CORESET,根据CORESET索引值,在两个参考CORESET中,选择出最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET,将选择出的CORESET确定为第一目标CORESET。由于第一目标CORESET包括一个TCI状态,可以将第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。If the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are reference CORESETs, when the first target CORESET is determined and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined, the lowest CORESET can be selected from the two reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value for the two reference CORESETs For the CORESET corresponding to the index value, the selected CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET. Since the first target CORESET includes one TCI state, the TCI state in the first target CORESET may be determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
下面针对终端设备未接收到目标使能参数(RRC信令中不携带目标使能参数)的情况,通过具体实例对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前确定PDSCH以及PDCCH对应的TCI状态、接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程进行阐述。In the following, for the case where the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter), a specific example is used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, receive the MAC-CE The process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的非SFN传输方式以及PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为1)。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is 1).
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态;针对PDCCH而言,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; for PDCCH, the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state. The TCI state of the RS is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的3个CORESET。参见图4所示,3个CORESET(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)中均包括1个TCI状态,其中,CORESET#3、CORESET#4、CORESET#5为目标BWP在另一时刻对应的3个CORESET。若通过RRC信令可知时刻0中的CORESET#0内SS set与时刻1中的CORESET#3内SS set为关联状态,终端设备可以认为这两个CORESET为不同的TRP时分复用发 送的,因此终端设备可选中相互关联的两个CORESET中CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#0),然后将选中的CORESET中的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。当然不同时刻不同CORESET内的SS set相关联还可以是其他情况(如,CORESET#0内SS set与CORESET#4内SS set相关联、CORESET#1内SS set与CORESET#4内SS set相关联),这里不再一一列举阐述。在第三CORESET为参考CORESET时,确定PDCCH、PDSCH对应的TCI状态还可以有其他实施情况,这里不再列举。After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to FIG. 4 , each of the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) includes one TCI state, wherein CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are the target BWPs at another moment in time The corresponding 3 CORESETs. If it can be known through RRC signaling that the SS set in CORESET#0 at time 0 and the SS set in CORESET#3 at time 1 are in an associated state, the terminal device can consider that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRPs. Therefore, The terminal device may select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value among the two correlated CORESETs, and then determine the TCI state in the selected CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. Of course, the association of SS sets in different CORESETs at different times can also be in other situations (for example, the SS set in CORESET#0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#4, and the SS set in CORESET#1 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#4. ), which will not be listed here. When the third CORESET is the reference CORESET, there may be other implementation situations for determining the TCI states corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH, which are not listed here.
本公开上述实施过程,通过在两个参考CORESET中选择索引值最低的CORESET为第一目标CORESET,可以实现基于最低索引值原则在不同时刻SS Set关联的两个CORESET中确定第一目标CORESET,通过将第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态,可以保证TCI状态确定的快捷性。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, by selecting the CORESET with the lowest index value among the two reference CORESETs as the first target CORESET, it is possible to determine the first target CORESET in the two CORESETs associated with the SS Sets at different times based on the principle of the lowest index value. Determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can ensure the quickness of the TCI state determination.
为了进一步说明按照优先级确定参考CORESET,下面针对终端设备未接收到目标使能参数(RRC信令中不携带目标使能参数)的情况,通过两个具体实例阐述确定TCI状态的过程。In order to further illustrate determining the reference CORESET according to the priority, the following describes the process of determining the TCI state through two specific examples for the case that the terminal device does not receive the target enable parameter (the RRC signaling does not carry the target enable parameter).
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的SFN传输方式以及PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为大于或者等于2、小于或者等于128的整数)。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128).
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个(取值为2至128)TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N (values 2 to 128) TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states. For the PDCCH, for each CORESET configuration including one TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration. For each CORESET configuration of the two TCI state index values, determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对 应的CORESET。参见图5所示,目标BWP内监测到CORESET#0包括一个TCI状态,CORESET#1以及CORESET#2分别包括两个TCI状态。CORESET#3、CORESET#4、CORESET#5为目标BWP在另一时刻对应的3个CORESET,CORESET#3、CORESET#4、CORESET#5分别包括一个TCI状态。通过RRC配置(RRC信令中的CORESET配置)可知时刻0中的CORESET#0内SS set与时刻1中的CORESET#3内SS set为关联状态。终端设备在检测参考CORESET时,首先检测是否存在包括两个TCI状态的CORESET,由于CORESET#1以及CORESET#2分别包括两个TCI状态,因此将CORESET#1以及CORESET#2确定为参考CORESET。然后将最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET(CORESET#1)确定为第一目标CORESET,将CORESET#1中的任意一个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。此实施例中虽然存在SS set关联,但包括两个TCI状态的CORESET的优先级高于形成SS set关联的CORESET的优先级,因此将CORESET#1以及CORESET#2确定为参考CORESET。After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs. Referring to FIG. 5 , it is detected in the target BWP that CORESET#0 includes one TCI state, and CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 include two TCI states respectively. CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state. Through the RRC configuration (CORESET configuration in RRC signaling), it can be known that the SS set in CORESET#0 in time 0 and the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1 are in an associated state. When the terminal device detects the reference CORESET, it first detects whether there is a CORESET including two TCI states. Since CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 respectively include two TCI states, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as the reference CORESET. Then, the CORESET (CORESET#1) corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value is determined as the first target CORESET, and any TCI state in the CORESET#1 is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. Although there is an SS set association in this embodiment, the priority of the CORESET including the two TCI states is higher than the priority of the CORESET forming the SS set association, so CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as reference CORESETs.
在另一具体实施过程中,终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的非SFN传输方式以及PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为大于或者等于2、小于或者等于128的整数)。In another specific implementation process, the terminal device receives RRC signaling sent by the network device, wherein the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (PDSCH configuration). It includes N TCI state index values, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128).
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个(取值为2至128)TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N (values 2 to 128) TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states. For the PDCCH, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的CORESET。参见图6所示,目标BWP内监测到的CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2分别包括一个TCI状态。CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5为目标BWP在另一时刻对应的3个CORESET,CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5分别包括一个TCI状态。通过RRC配置可知时刻0中的CORESET#0内SS set与时刻1中的CORESET#3内SS set为关联状态,时刻0中的CORESET#1内SS set与时刻0中的 CORESET#2内SS set同样为关联状态,因此终端设备可以认为CORESET#0、CORESET#3为不同的TRP时分复用发送的,CORESET#1、CORESET#2为不同的TRP频分复用发送的,终端设备优先选中同一时刻内相互关联的两个CORESET(CORESET#1、CORESET#2)为参考CORESET,然后将参考CORESET中CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#1)确定为第一目标CORESET,将CORESET#1中TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。此实施例中虽然存在同一时刻的SS set关联以及不同时刻的SS set关联,由于同一时刻的SS set关联的优先级高于不同时刻的SS set关联的优先级,因此将CORESET#1、CORESET#2确定为参考CORESET。After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving the scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs. Referring to FIG. 6 , CORESET#0, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 monitored in the target BWP respectively include a TCI state. CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state. Through the RRC configuration, it can be seen that the SS set in CORESET#0 in time 0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1, and the SS set in CORESET#1 in time 0 is related to the SS set in CORESET#2 in time 0. The same is in the associated state, so the terminal device can think that CORESET#0 and CORESET#3 are sent by different TRP time division multiplexing, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are sent by different TRP frequency division multiplexing, the terminal device preferentially selects the same TRP The two CORESETs (CORESET#1, CORESET#2) that are related to each other in the moment are the reference CORESETs, and then the CORESET (CORESET#1) with the lowest CORESET index value in the reference CORESET is determined as the first target CORESET, and the TCI in CORESET#1 is determined as the first target CORESET. The state is determined to be the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. In this embodiment, although there are SS set associations at the same time and SS set associations at different times, since the priority of the SS set association at the same time is higher than the priority of the SS set association at different times, CORESET#1, CORESET# 2 Determined as the reference CORESET.
下面针对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,RRC信令中携带目标使能参数的情况,对确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程进行阐述。在本实施例中,所述根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The following describes the process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH in the case where the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE. In this embodiment, determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule includes:
在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;In the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle The target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
在根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,针对参考CORESET为第一CORESET的情况,由于每个CORESET配置还可以包括CORESET索引值,此时可以根据参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,且由于第一CORESET为包括两个TCI状态的CORESET,因此可以在选择出第二目标CORESET之后,将第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, when the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs, for the case where the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, since each CORESET configuration can also Including the CORESET index value, at this time, a second target CORESET can be selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index values corresponding to the reference CORESETs, and since the first CORESET is a CORESET including two TCI states, it can be selected in the After the second target CORESET, the two TCI states in the second target CORESET are determined as TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
在根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态时,针对参考CORESET为第二CORESET的情况或者参考CORESET为第三CORESET和第四CORESET的情况,可以根据SS set关联原则将两个参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,具体为,根据同一时刻的SS set关联,将两个第二CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,根据不同时刻的SS set关联,将第三CORESET和第四CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET。According to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, when determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs, for the case where the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and In the case of the fourth CORESET, two reference CORESETs can be determined as two second target CORESETs according to the SS set association principle, specifically, according to the SS set association at the same time, the two second CORESETs are determined as two second targets CORESET, according to the association of SS sets at different times, the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are determined as two second target CORESETs.
由于第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态,且两个第二CORESET对应不同的TCI状态,针对将两个第二CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET的情况,可以将两个第二CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。由于第三CORESET和第四CORESET分别包括一个TCI状态,且第三CORESET和第四CORESET对应于不同的TCI状态,针对将第三CORESET和第四CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET的情况,可以将第三CORESET和第四CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Since the second CORESET includes one TCI state, and the two second CORESETs correspond to different TCI states, in the case of determining the two second CORESETs as two second target CORESETs, the TCI states in the two second CORESETs may be Combining is performed, and the combined two TCI states are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Since the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET respectively include one TCI state, and the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET correspond to different TCI states, for the case where the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are determined as two second target CORESETs, it is possible to The TCI states in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are combined, and the combined two TCI states are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
由于RRC信令中携带目标使能参数,且目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,因此可以确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。Since the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, and the target enable parameter is used to indicate that the two default TCI states are enabled, the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined.
本公开上述实施过程,在参考CORESET为第一CORESET时,可以根据CORESET索引值确定第二目标CORESET,根据第二目标CORESET内的TCI状态确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态;在参考CORESET为第二CORESET时,根据同一时刻的SS set关联将两个第二CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,以基于TCI状态组合确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态,在参考CORESET为第三CORESET和第四CORESET时,根据不同时刻的SS set关联将第三CORESET和第四CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,实现基于TCI状态组合确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, when the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, the second target CORESET can be determined according to the CORESET index value, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined according to the TCI state in the second target CORESET; when the reference CORESET is the second CORESET , combine the TCI states in the two second CORESETs according to the SS set association at the same time, to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the TCI state combination, when the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, according to different time The SS set association combines the TCI states in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the TCI state combination.
可选的,在上述实施例的基础上,所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,包括;Optionally, on the basis of the foregoing embodiment, selecting a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, including;
将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
在基于CORESET索引值在L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET时,可以在L个参考CORESET中,筛选出CORESET索引值最低的参考CORESET,将筛选出的参考CORESET确定为第二目标CORESET。即,实现基于索引值最低原则确定第二目标CORESET。When a second target CORESET is selected among the L reference CORESETs based on the CORESET index value, the reference CORESET with the lowest CORESET index value may be filtered out of the L reference CORESETs, and the filtered reference CORESET is determined as the second target CORESET. That is, it is implemented to determine the second target CORESET based on the principle of the lowest index value.
下面针对RRC信令中携带目标使能参数,即终端设备接收到目标使能参数的情况,通过几个具体实例,对接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前确定PDSCH以及PDCCH对应的TCI状态、接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的过程进行阐述。In the following, for the case where the target enabling parameters are carried in the RRC signaling, that is, the terminal device receives the target enabling parameters, several specific examples are used to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH and the PDCCH before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, and the receiving MAC The process of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH after the activation information of the CE will be described.
实例一Example 1
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDSCH配置以及目标使能参数。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, wherein the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, SFN transmission modes corresponding to PDSCH, SFN transmission modes corresponding to PDCCH, PDSCH configurations, and target enabling parameters.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个(取值为2至128)TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N (values 2 to 128) TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states. For the PDCCH, for each CORESET configuration including one TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration. For each CORESET configuration of the two TCI state index values, determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
由于RRC信令携带目标使能参数,需要确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的3个CORESET。参见图2a所示,在3个CORESET中(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)均包括两个TCI状态时,选择CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#0),将选中的CORESET中的两个TCI状态(TCI状态#0、TCI状态#1)确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。或者,参见图2b所示,在3个CORESET中(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2),仅CORESET索引值最低的CORESET(CORESET#0)包括 两个TCI状态,其余CORESET(CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)均包括一个TCI状态,则将包括两个TCI状态的CORESET#0确定为第一目标CORESET,将CORESET#0中的两个TCI状态(TCI状态#0、TCI状态#1)确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。此时,可以根据最低索引值原则,根据包括两个TCI状态的CORESET确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。当然3个CORESET中对应的TCI状态还可以是其他情况,这里不再一一列举阐述。该实施例中,接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后的过程,为基于第一CORESET确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的情况。Since the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH need to be determined. After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to Figure 2a, when the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) all include two TCI states, select the CORESET (CORESET#0) with the lowest CORESET index value, and place the selected CORESET in the The two TCI states (TCI state #0, TCI state #1) are determined to be the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Or, as shown in Figure 2b, among the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2), only the CORESET with the lowest CORESET index value (CORESET#0) includes two TCI states, and the remaining CORESETs (CORESET# 1 and CORESET#2) both include one TCI state, then the CORESET#0 including two TCI states is determined as the first target CORESET, and the two TCI states (TCI state #0, TCI state #1) in CORESET#0 are determined as the first target CORESET. ) is determined as two TCI states corresponding to PDSCH. At this time, according to the principle of the lowest index value, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH may be determined according to the CORESET including two TCI states. Of course, the corresponding TCI states in the three CORESETs may also be other situations, which will not be listed and described here. In this embodiment, the process after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE is the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the first CORESET.
实例二Example 2
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的非SFN传输方式、PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为大于或者等于2、小于或者等于128的整数)以及目标使能参数。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128) and a target enable parameter.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. For the PDCCH, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
由于RRC信令携带目标使能参数,需要确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的3个CORESET。参见图3所示,在3个CORESET中(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)均包括1个TCI状态时,由于CORESET#0内SS set与CORESET#1内SS set为关联状态,因此终端设备可以认为这两个CORESET为不同的TRP频分复用发送的,终端设备可选中相互关联的两个CORESET一起组合确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。此时,可以根据同一时刻SS set关联的两个CORESET对应的TCI确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态。当然3个CORESET中的SS set关联还可以是其他情况,这里不再一一列举阐述。该实施例中,接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后的过程,为基于第二CORESET确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的情况。Since the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH need to be determined. After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to Figure 3, when three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2) all include one TCI state, since the SS set in CORESET#0 and the SS set in CORESET#1 are associated states, Therefore, the terminal device may consider that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRP frequency division multiplexing, and the terminal device may select two CORESETs that are related to each other and combine them together to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. At this time, the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH can be determined according to the TCI corresponding to the two CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same time. Of course, the SS set associations in the three CORESETs can also be in other situations, which will not be listed here. In this embodiment, the process after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE is the case where the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined based on the second CORESET.
实例三Example three
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的非SFN传输方式、PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为1)以及目标使能参数。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is 1) and the target enable parameter.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态;针对PDCCH而言,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; for PDCCH, the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state. The TCI state of the RS is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
由于RRC信令携带目标使能参数,需要确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的3个CORESET。参见图4所示,3个CORESET(CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2)中均包括1个TCI状态,CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5为目标BWP在另一时刻对应的3个CORESET。若通过RRC信令可知时刻0中的CORESET#0内SS set与时刻1中的CORESET#3内SS set为关联状态,终端设备可以认为这两个CORESET为不同的TRP时分复用发送的,终端设备可以将CORESET#0对应的TCI状态与CORESET#3对应的TCI状态进行组合,确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。当然不同时刻不同CORESET内的SS set相关联还可以是其他情况,这里不再一一列举阐述。该实施例中,接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后的过程,为基于第三CORESET、第四CORESET确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态的情况。Since the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH need to be determined. After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving its scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, it determines 3 CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP among the M CORESETs. Referring to Figure 4, each of the three CORESETs (CORESET#0, CORESET#1, and CORESET#2) includes one TCI state, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. 3 CORESETs. If it can be known through RRC signaling that the SS set in CORESET#0 at time 0 and the SS set in CORESET#3 at time 1 are in an associated state, the terminal device can consider that the two CORESETs are sent by different TRPs. The device may combine the TCI state corresponding to CORESET#0 and the TCI state corresponding to CORESET#3 to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH. Of course, the association of SS sets in different CORESETs at different times can also be in other situations, which will not be listed here. In this embodiment, the process after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE is the case of determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH based on the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET.
实例四Example 4
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为大于或者等于2、小于或者等于128的整数)以及目标使能参数。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128) and the target enable parameter.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个(取值为2至128)TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态, 针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N (values 2 to 128) TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states. For PDCCH, for each CORESET configuration including one TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and for each CORESET configuration including at least one For each CORESET configuration of the two TCI state index values, determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes: The TCI status corresponding to each CORESET.
由于RRC信令携带目标使能参数,需要确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的CORESET。参见图5所示,目标BWP内监测到的CORESET#0包括一个TCI状态,CORESET#1以及CORESET#2分别包括两个TCI状态。CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5为目标BWP在另一时刻对应的3个CORESET,CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5分别包括一个TCI状态,通过RRC配置可知时刻0中的CORESET#0内SS set与时刻1中的CORESET#3内SS set为关联状态。终端设备在检测参考CORESET时,首先检测是否存在包括两个TCI状态的CORESET,由于CORESET#1以及CORESET#2分别包括两个TCI状态,因此将CORESET#1以及CORESET#2确定为参考CORESET。然后将最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET(CORESET#1)确定为第一目标CORESET,将CORESET#1中的两个TCI状态确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。此实施例中虽然存在SS set关联,但包括两个TCI状态的CORESET的优先级高于形成SS set关联的CORESET的优先级,因此将CORESET#1以及CORESET#2确定为参考CORESET。Since the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH need to be determined. After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving the scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs. Referring to FIG. 5 , CORESET#0 monitored in the target BWP includes one TCI state, and CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 respectively include two TCI states. CORESET#3, CORESET#4 and CORESET#5 are the three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another time. CORESET#3, CORESET#4 and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state. Through RRC configuration, we can know that CORESET at time 0 The SS set in #0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1. When the terminal device detects the reference CORESET, it first detects whether there is a CORESET including two TCI states. Since CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 respectively include two TCI states, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as the reference CORESET. Then, the CORESET (CORESET#1) corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value is determined as the first target CORESET, and the two TCI states in CORESET#1 are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Although there is an SS set association in this embodiment, the priority of the CORESET including the two TCI states is higher than the priority of the CORESET forming the SS set association, so CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are determined as reference CORESETs.
实施例五 Embodiment 5
终端设备接收网络设备发送的RRC信令,其中,RRC信令携带M个CORESET配置、PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式、PDCCH对应的非SFN传输方式、PDSCH配置(PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值,N为大于或者等于2、小于或者等于128的整数)以及目标使能参数。The terminal device receives the RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries M CORESET configurations, the SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDSCH, the non-SFN transmission mode corresponding to PDCCH, and the PDSCH configuration (the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values, N is an integer greater than or equal to 2 and less than or equal to 128) and a target enable parameter.
在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,将PDSCH配置中N个(取值为2至128)TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态。针对PDCCH而言,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态。Before the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N (values 2 to 128) TCI state index values in the PDSCH configuration are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Two TCI states. For the PDCCH, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH.
由于RRC信令携带目标使能参数,需要确定PDSCH对应的两个TCI状 态。在终端设备接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,接收DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,在M个CORESET中确定目标BWP对应的CORESET。参见图6所示,目标BWP内监测到的CORESET#0、CORESET#1以及CORESET#2分别包括一个TCI状态。CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5为目标BWP在另一时刻对应的3个CORESET,CORESET#3、CORESET#4以及CORESET#5分别包括一个TCI状态。通过RRC配置可知时刻0中的CORESET#0内SS set与时刻1中的CORESET#3内SS set为关联状态,时刻0中的CORESET#1内SS set与时刻0中的CORESET#2内SS set同样为关联状态,终端设备可以认为CORESET#0、CORESET#3为不同的TRP时分复用发送的,CORESET#1、CORESET#2为不同的TRP频分复用发送的,终端设备优先选中同一时刻内相互关联的两个CORESET(CORESET#1、CORESET#2)为参考CORESET,然后将参考CORESET中TCI状态进行组合确定为PDSCH对应的TCI状态。此实施例中虽然存在同一时刻的SS set关联以及不同时刻的SS set关联,由于同一时刻的SS set关联的优先级高于不同时刻的SS set关联的优先级,因此将CORESET#1、CORESET#2确定为参考CORESET。Since the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter, two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH need to be determined. After the terminal device receives the activation information of the MAC-CE, when the time interval between receiving the DCI and receiving the scheduled PDSCH is less than the preset threshold, the CORESET corresponding to the target BWP is determined among the M CORESETs. Referring to FIG. 6 , CORESET#0, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 monitored in the target BWP respectively include a TCI state. CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 are three CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment, and CORESET#3, CORESET#4, and CORESET#5 respectively include a TCI state. Through the RRC configuration, it can be seen that the SS set in CORESET#0 in time 0 is associated with the SS set in CORESET#3 in time 1, and the SS set in CORESET#1 in time 0 is related to the SS set in CORESET#2 in time 0. In the same state of association, the terminal device can consider that CORESET#0 and CORESET#3 are sent by different TRP time-division multiplexing, CORESET#1 and CORESET#2 are sent by different TRP frequency-division multiplexing, and the terminal device preferentially selects the same time The two CORESETs (CORESET#1 and CORESET#2) that are correlated with each other are the reference CORESETs, and then the TCI states in the reference CORESETs are combined to determine the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH. Although there are SS set associations at the same time and SS set associations at different times in this embodiment, since the priority of the SS set association at the same time is higher than the priority of the SS set association at different times, CORESET#1, CORESET# 2 Determined as the reference CORESET.
以上几个实施例,仅仅用于说明终端设备接收到目标使能参数时,确定PDCCH、PDSCH对应的TCI状态的几种情况,对于其他实施情况这里不再一一列举。The above embodiments are only used to describe several situations in which the terminal device determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH and PDSCH when the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, and other implementation situations are not listed here.
在本公开一可选实施例中,在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,还包括:In an optional embodiment of the present disclosure, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further includes:
通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者Receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval by using the determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。The two default beams sent by the network device are respectively received within the time interval by using the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
终端设备在接收到MAC-CE的激活信息且确定PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,可以在时间间隔内通过PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收网络设备发送的一个默认波束。或者在时间间隔内通过PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态接收网络设备发送的两个默认波束。After receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the terminal device may receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH within a time interval. Or receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH within the time interval.
本公开上述实施过程,可以在接收到MAC-CE的激活信息之后,在时间 间隔内,通过PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收网络设备发送的一个默认接收波束,或者,通过PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态接收网络设备发送的两个默认波束。In the above implementation process of the present disclosure, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, within a time interval, a default receive beam sent by a network device can be received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, or two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH can be received. Receive two default beams sent by network devices.
以上为本公开实施例传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法的实施过程,在PDSCH为SFN传输时,在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之前,可根据PDSCH配置确定PDSCH的TCI状态、根据PDCCH的不同传输方式来确定PDCCH的TCI状态,在接收MAC-CE的激活信息之后,可动态根据终端设备是否接收到目标使能参数的情况来确定PDSCH的TCI状态,从而保证PDSCH和PDCCH数据的正确接收。The above is the implementation process of the method for determining the TCI state of the transmission configuration indication according to the embodiment of the present disclosure. When the PDSCH is SFN transmission, before receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI state of the PDSCH can be determined according to the PDSCH configuration, and the TCI state of the PDSCH can be determined according to the different transmissions of the PDCCH. After receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE, the TCI state of the PDSCH can be dynamically determined according to whether the terminal device receives the target enable parameter, so as to ensure the correct reception of PDSCH and PDCCH data.
以上介绍了本公开实施例提供的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,下面将结合附图介绍本公开实施例提供的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定装置。The method for determining the TCI state of the transmission configuration indication provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure has been described above. The following describes the apparatus for determining the TCI state of the transmission configuration indication provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure with reference to the accompanying drawings.
参见图7,本公开实施例还提供了一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定装置,应用于终端设备,包括:Referring to FIG. 7 , an embodiment of the present disclosure further provides an apparatus for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
第一接收模块701,用于接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;The first receiving module 701 is configured to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel The target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
第一确定模块702,用于在接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;The first determining module 702 is configured to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, The target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
第二确定模块703,用于在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;The second determining module 703 is configured to, when the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than a preset threshold, determine whether the target is carried in the RRC signaling according to whether the The condition of enabling parameters, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
可选的,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;所述第一确定模块包括:Optionally, the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the first determining module includes:
第一确定子模块,用于在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;The first determination sub-module is used to determine the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values respectively when the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, as Two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
第二确定子模块,用于在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。The second determination sub-module is used to determine the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access when the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1 is a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第二接收模块,用于在所述第一确定模块根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,在N大于或者等于2的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;The second receiving module is configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, in the case where N is greater than or equal to 2, use the two corresponding PDSCH two TCI states respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device;
第三接收模块,用于在所述第一确定模块根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,在N的取值为1的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。The third receiving module is configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, in the case where the value of N is 1, through the corresponding PDSCH A TCI state receives a default beam sent by the network device.
可选的,第一确定模块包括:Optionally, the first determining module includes:
第三确定子模块,用于在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;The third determination sub-module is configured to determine the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access when the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
第四确定子模块,用于在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。The fourth determination sub-module is used for, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, when the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, the SSB/CSI-RS during random access The TCI state is determined as the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration. For each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration are determined. is the TCI state corresponding to the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration, and the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
可选的,该装置还包括:Optionally, the device further includes:
第四接收模块,用于在所述第一确定模块根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,在所述PDCCH为非SFN传 输方式的情况下,通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;a fourth receiving module, configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, in the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, pass the PDCCH A corresponding TCI state receives a default beam sent by the network device;
第五接收模块,用于在所述第一确定模块根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。A fifth receiving module, configured to, after the first determining module determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, in the case that the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, One or two default beams sent by the network device are received through the corresponding TCI state.
可选的,所述第二确定模块包括:Optionally, the second determining module includes:
第五确定子模块,用于在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;The fifth determination submodule is used to determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP among the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3 ;
第六确定子模块,用于在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;The sixth determination sub-module is used to determine L reference CORESETs according to a preset strategy after determining K CORESETs, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
第七确定子模块,用于在RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;A seventh determination sub-module, configured to determine in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule when the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
第八确定子模块,用于在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。The eighth determination sub-module is configured to, when the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs Determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SSSet与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;Optionally, the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SSSet in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
所述第六确定子模块包括:The sixth determination submodule includes:
第一检测单元,用于检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;a first detection unit, configured to detect whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
第一确定单元,用于在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;a first determining unit, configured to determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET in the presence of the first CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
第二检测单元,用于在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;a second detection unit, configured to detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs in the absence of the first CORESET;
第二确定单元,用于在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括 一个TCI状态;a second determining unit, configured to determine that two of the second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs when there are two of the second CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
第三检测单元,用于在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;A third detection unit, configured to detect whether there is a third CORESET among the K CORESETs in the absence of two of the second CORESETs, where the SS Set in the third CORESET and the target BWP are at another moment The SS Set in the fourth CORESET in the corresponding P CORESETs forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
第三确定单元,用于在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态。a third determining unit, configured to determine that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs in the presence of the third CORESET, and both the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are Include a TCI status.
可选的,所述第七确定子模块进一步用于:Optionally, the seventh determination submodule is further used for:
根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下,所述第七确定子模块进一步用于:Optionally, when the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, the seventh determination sub-module is further configured to:
将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下,所述第七确定子模块进一步用于:Optionally, in the case where the two second CORESETs are the two reference CORESETs, the seventh determination submodule is further configured to:
将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,在所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下,所述第七确定子模块进一步用于:Optionally, when the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, the seventh determination submodule is further configured to:
将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,所述第八确定子模块包括:Optionally, the eighth determination submodule includes:
第一处理单元,用于在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况 下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;a first processing unit, configured to select a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs in the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, Determining the two TCI states in the second target CORESET as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
第二处理单元,用于在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。a second processing unit, configured to associate the two reference CORESETs according to the SS set association principle when the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET The CORESETs are determined as two second target CORESETs, the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs are combined, and the combined two TCI states are determined as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述第一处理单元进一步用于:Optionally, the first processing unit is further configured to:
将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
可选的,在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,该装置还包括:Optionally, after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the apparatus further includes:
第六接收模块,用于通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者A sixth receiving module, configured to receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval through a determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
第七接收模块,用于通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。A seventh receiving module, configured to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval by using the two determined TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
需要说明的是,本公开实施例中对模块(单元)的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。另外,在本公开各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。It should be noted that the division of modules (units) in the embodiments of the present disclosure is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation. In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present disclosure may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个处理器可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本公开的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本公开各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory, RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a processor-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the present disclosure can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present disclosure. The aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
在此需要说明的是,本公开实施例提供的上述装置,能够实现上述方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤,且能够达到相同的技术效果,在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。It should be noted here that the above-mentioned device provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can realize all the method steps realized by the above-mentioned method embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect, and the same as the method embodiment in this embodiment is not repeated here. The parts and beneficial effects will be described in detail.
本公开实施例还提供一种终端设备,如图8所示,该终端设备包括存储器801、收发机802、处理器803;存储器801,用于存储计算机程序;收发机802,用于在处理器803的控制下接收和发送数据;处理器803,用于读取所述存储器801中的计算机程序并执行以下操作:An embodiment of the present disclosure further provides a terminal device. As shown in FIG. 8 , the terminal device includes a memory 801, a transceiver 802, and a processor 803; the memory 801 is used to store a computer program; 803 to receive and send data under the control; processor 803, for reading the computer program in the memory 801 and performing the following operations:
控制所述收发机802接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;Control the transceiver 802 to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH corresponding The CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
在所述收发机802接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;Before the transceiver 802 receives the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, it determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the PDCCH The corresponding target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在所述收发机802接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the transceiver 802 receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the transceiver 802 is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter situation, CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
可选的,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the RRC signaling also carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;When the PDSCH is in the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。In the case that the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, after determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
在N大于或者等于2的情况下,控制所述收发机802通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;In the case that N is greater than or equal to 2, control the transceiver 802 to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
在N的取值为1的情况下,控制所述收发机802通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is 1, the transceiver 802 is controlled to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration The TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration The corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
可选的,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, after the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH is determined according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,控制所述收发机802通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;In the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, controlling the transceiver 802 to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,控制所述收发机802通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, the transceiver 802 is controlled to receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI state.
可选的,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者 等于3的整数;Determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP in the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;After the K CORESETs are determined, L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在所述RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
可选的,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SS Set与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;Optionally, the CORESET configuration also includes the CORESET index value and the association between the search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and the SS Set in other CORESETs;
所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:The processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;Detecting whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;In the presence of the first CORESET, determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;In the absence of the first CORESET, detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs;
在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态;In the presence of two of the second CORESETs, determining that the two second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;In the case where there are no two second CORESETs, it is detected whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs, the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. The SS Set in the fourth CORESET forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态。In the presence of the third CORESET, it is determined that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
可选的,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标 CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
可选的,在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下;所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, in the case that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET; the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, in the case where the two second CORESETs are the two reference CORESETs; the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,在所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, in the case that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs; the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
可选的,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;In the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle The target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
可选的,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
可选的,在所述收发机802接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且所述处理器803确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器803还用于执行以下操作:Optionally, after the transceiver 802 receives the MAC-CE activation information and the processor 803 determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the processor 803 is further configured to perform the following operations:
控制所述收发机802通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者Control the transceiver 802 to receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval through a determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
控制所述收发机802通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。The transceiver 802 is controlled to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval through the two determined TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
其中,在图8中,总线架构可以包括任意数量的互联的总线和桥,具体由处理器803代表的一个或多个处理器和存储器801代表的存储器的各种电路链接在一起。总线架构还可以将诸如外围设备、稳压器和功率管理电路等之类的各种其他电路链接在一起,这些都是本领域所公知的,因此,本文不再对其进行进一步描述。总线接口提供接口。收发机802可以是多个元件,即包括发送机和接收机,提供用于在传输介质上与各种其他装置通信的单元,这些传输介质包括无线信道、有线信道、光缆等传输介质。针对不同的用户设备,用户接口804还可以是能够外接内接需要设备的接口,连接的设备包括但不限于小键盘、显示器、扬声器、麦克风、操纵杆等。8, the bus architecture may include any number of interconnected buses and bridges, specifically, one or more processors represented by processor 803 and various circuits of memory represented by memory 801 are linked together. The bus architecture may also link together various other circuits, such as peripherals, voltage regulators, and power management circuits, which are well known in the art and, therefore, will not be described further herein. The bus interface provides the interface. Transceiver 802 may be multiple elements, ie, including transmitters and receivers, providing means for communicating with various other devices over transmission media including wireless channels, wired channels, fiber optic cables, and the like. For different user equipments, the user interface 804 may also be an interface capable of externally connecting the required equipment, and the connected equipment includes but is not limited to a keypad, a display, a speaker, a microphone, a joystick, and the like.
处理器803负责管理总线架构和通常的处理,存储器801可以存储处理器803在执行操作时所使用的数据。The processor 803 is responsible for managing the bus architecture and general processing, and the memory 801 may store data used by the processor 803 in performing operations.
处理器803可以是中央处埋器(CPU)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或复杂可编程逻辑器件(Complex Programmable Logic Device,CPLD),处理器也可以采用多核架构。The processor 803 may be a central processor (CPU), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or a complex programmable logic device (Complex Programmable Logic Device). , CPLD), the processor can also use a multi-core architecture.
处理器803通过调用存储器存储的计算机程序,用于按照获得的可执行指令执行本公开实施例提供的所述方法。处理器803与存储器801也可以物理上分开布置。The processor 803 is configured to execute the method provided by the embodiments of the present disclosure according to the obtained executable instructions by invoking the computer program stored in the memory. The processor 803 and the memory 801 may also be arranged physically separately.
在此需要说明的是,本公开实施例提供的上述设备,能够实现上述方法实施例所实现的所有方法步骤,且能够达到相同的技术效果,在此不再对本实施例中与方法实施例相同的部分及有益效果进行具体赘述。It should be noted here that the above-mentioned device provided by the embodiment of the present disclosure can realize all the method steps realized by the above-mentioned method embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect, and the same as the method embodiment in this embodiment is not repeated here. The parts and beneficial effects will be described in detail.
本公开的实施例还提供了一种处理器可读存储介质,所述处理器可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述传输配 置指示TCI状态的确定方法中的步骤。Embodiments of the present disclosure also provide a processor-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the processor-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the above-mentioned method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication is implemented. A step of.
所述处理器可读存储介质可以是处理器能够存取的任何可用介质或数据存储设备,包括但不限于磁性存储器(例如软盘、硬盘、磁带、磁光盘(MO)等)、光学存储器(例如CD、DVD、BD、HVD等)、以及半导体存储器(例如ROM、EPROM、EEPROM、非易失性存储器(NAND FLASH)、固态硬盘(SSD))等。The processor-readable storage medium can be any available medium or data storage device that can be accessed by a processor, including, but not limited to, magnetic storage (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape, magneto-optical disk (MO), etc.), optical storage (eg, CD, DVD, BD, HVD, etc.), and semiconductor memory (eg, ROM, EPROM, EEPROM, non-volatile memory (NAND FLASH), solid-state disk (SSD)), etc.
本公开的实施例还提供一种计算机程序,包括计算机可读代码,当所述计算机可读代码在计算处理设备上运行时,导致所述计算处理设备执行上述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法。Embodiments of the present disclosure also provide a computer program, including computer-readable code, which, when the computer-readable code is executed on a computing and processing device, causes the computing and processing device to execute the above-mentioned method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication .
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本公开的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本公开可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本公开可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器和光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。As will be appreciated by one skilled in the art, embodiments of the present disclosure may be provided as a method, system, or computer program product. Accordingly, the present disclosure may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present disclosure may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media having computer-usable program code embodied therein, including but not limited to disk storage, optical storage, and the like.
本公开是参照根据本公开实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机可执行指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机可执行指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present disclosure is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to embodiments of the disclosure. It will be understood that each flow and/or block in the flowcharts and/or block diagrams, and combinations of flows and/or blocks in the flowcharts and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer-executable instructions. These computer-executable instructions may be provided to the processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce Means for implementing the functions specified in a flow or flow of a flowchart and/or a block or blocks of a block diagram.
这些处理器可执行指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的处理器可读存储器中,使得存储在该处理器可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These processor-executable instructions may also be stored in a processor-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to operate in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the processor-readable memory result in the manufacture of means including the instructions product, the instruction means implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowchart and/or the block or blocks of the block diagram.
这些处理器可执行指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These processor-executable instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process that Execution of the instructions provides steps for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart or blocks and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,其中所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部模块来实现本实施例方案的目的。本领域普通技术人员在不付出创造性的劳动的情况下,即可以理解并实施。The device embodiments described above are only illustrative, wherein the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in One place, or it can be distributed over multiple network elements. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand and implement it without creative effort.
本公开的各个部件实施例可以以硬件实现,或者以在一个或者多个处理器上运行的软件模块实现,或者以它们的组合实现。本领域的技术人员应当理解,可以在实践中使用微处理器或者数字信号处理器(DSP)来实现根据本公开实施例的计算处理设备中的一些或者全部部件的一些或者全部功能。本公开还可以实现为用于执行这里所描述的方法的一部分或者全部的设备或者装置程序(例如,计算机程序和计算机程序产品)。这样的实现本公开的程序可以存储在计算机可读介质上,或者可以具有一个或者多个信号的形式。这样的信号可以从因特网网站上下载得到,或者在载体信号上提供,或者以任何其他形式提供。Various component embodiments of the present disclosure may be implemented in hardware, or in software modules running on one or more processors, or in a combination thereof. Those skilled in the art will understand that a microprocessor or a digital signal processor (DSP) may be used in practice to implement some or all of the functions of some or all of the components in a computing processing device according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The present disclosure can also be implemented as apparatus or apparatus programs (eg, computer programs and computer program products) for performing some or all of the methods described herein. Such a program implementing the present disclosure may be stored on a computer-readable medium, or may be in the form of one or more signals. Such signals may be downloaded from Internet sites, or provided on carrier signals, or in any other form.
例如,图9示出了可以实现根据本公开的方法的计算处理设备。该计算处理设备传统上包括处理器910和以存储器920形式的计算机程序产品或者计算机可读介质。存储器920可以是诸如闪存、EEPROM(电可擦除可编程只读存储器)、EPROM、硬盘或者ROM之类的电子存储器。存储器920具有用于执行上述方法中的任何方法步骤的程序代码931的存储空间930。例如,用于程序代码的存储空间930可以包括分别用于实现上面的方法中的各种步骤的各个程序代码931。这些程序代码可以从一个或者多个计算机程序产品中读出或者写入到这一个或者多个计算机程序产品中。这些计算机程序产品包括诸如硬盘,紧致盘(CD)、存储卡或者软盘之类的程序代码载体。这样的计算机程序产品通常为如参考图10所述的便携式或者固定存储单元。该存储单元可以具有与图9的计算处理设备中的存储器920类似布置的存储段、存储空间等。程序代码可以例如以适当形式进行压缩。通常,存储单元包括计算机可读代码931’,即可以由例如诸如910之类的处理器读取的代码,这些代码当由计算处理设备运行时,导致该计算处理设备执行上面所描述的方法 中的各个步骤。For example, Figure 9 illustrates a computing processing device that may implement methods in accordance with the present disclosure. The computing processing device traditionally includes a processor 910 and a computer program product or computer readable medium in the form of a memory 920 . The memory 920 may be electronic memory such as flash memory, EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), EPROM, hard disk, or ROM. The memory 920 has storage space 930 for program code 931 for performing any of the method steps in the above-described methods. For example, the storage space 930 for program codes may include various program codes 931 for implementing various steps in the above methods, respectively. These program codes can be read from or written to one or more computer program products. These computer program products include program code carriers such as hard disks, compact disks (CDs), memory cards or floppy disks. Such computer program products are typically portable or fixed storage units as described with reference to FIG. 10 . The storage unit may have storage segments, storage spaces, etc. arranged similarly to the memory 920 in the computing processing device of FIG. 9 . The program code may, for example, be compressed in a suitable form. Typically, the storage unit includes computer readable code 931', ie code readable by a processor such as 910, for example, which when executed by a computing processing device, causes the computing processing device to perform any of the methods described above. of the various steps.
本文中所称的“一个实施例”、“实施例”或者“一个或者多个实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或者特性包括在本公开的至少一个实施例中。此外,请注意,这里“在一个实施例中”的词语例子不一定全指同一个实施例。Reference herein to "one embodiment," "an embodiment," or "one or more embodiments" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with an embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present disclosure. Also, please note that instances of the phrase "in one embodiment" herein are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment.
在此处所提供的说明书中,说明了大量具体细节。然而,能够理解,本公开的实施例可以在没有这些具体细节的情况下被实践。在一些实例中,并未详细示出公知的方法、结构和技术,以便不模糊对本说明书的理解。In the description provided herein, numerous specific details are set forth. It is to be understood, however, that embodiments of the present disclosure may be practiced without these specific details. In some instances, well-known methods, structures and techniques have not been shown in detail in order not to obscure an understanding of this description.
在权利要求中,不应将位于括号之间的任何参考符号构造成对权利要求的限制。单词“包含”不排除存在未列在权利要求中的元件或步骤。位于元件之前的单词“一”或“一个”不排除存在多个这样的元件。本公开可以借助于包括有若干不同元件的硬件以及借助于适当编程的计算机来实现。在列举了若干装置的单元权利要求中,这些装置中的若干个可以是通过同一个硬件项来具体体现。单词第一、第二、以及第三等的使用不表示任何顺序。可将这些单词解释为名称。In the claims, any reference signs placed between parentheses shall not be construed as limiting the claim. The word "comprising" does not exclude the presence of elements or steps not listed in a claim. The word "a" or "an" preceding an element does not exclude the presence of a plurality of such elements. The present disclosure may be implemented by means of hardware comprising several different elements and by means of a suitably programmed computer. In a unit claim enumerating several means, several of these means may be embodied by one and the same item of hardware. The use of the words first, second, and third, etc. do not denote any order. These words can be interpreted as names.
最后应说明的是:以上实施例仅用以说明本公开的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本公开进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本公开各实施例技术方案的精神和范围。Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present disclosure, but not to limit them; although the present disclosure has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that: it can still be Modifications are made to the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments, or some technical features thereof are equivalently replaced; and these modifications or replacements do not make the essence of the corresponding technical solutions depart from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present disclosure.

Claims (31)

  1. 一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,应用于终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, applied to a terminal device, is characterized in that, comprising:
    接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;Receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the target transmission mode corresponding to the downlink control channel PDCCH. The CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
    在接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;Before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
    在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than the preset threshold, CORESET is selected according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter or not. Rules and TCI state selection rules to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
    其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 1, wherein the RRC signaling further carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values;
    所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH includes:
    在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;When the PDSCH is in the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
    在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述 PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。In the case that the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,还包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 2, wherein after determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further comprises:
    在N大于或者等于2的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;When N is greater than or equal to 2, receive two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
    在N的取值为1的情况下,通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is 1, a default beam sent by the network device is received through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 1, wherein the determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH comprises:
    在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
    在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration The TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration The corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,还包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 4, wherein after determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the method further comprises:
    在所述PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;In the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, receiving a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
    在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, one or two default beams sent by the network device are received through the corresponding TCI state.
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规 则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 1, wherein the determination of the TCI status corresponding to PDSCH, including:
    在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;Determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
    在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;After the K CORESETs are determined, L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
    在所述RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
    在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SS Set与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 6, wherein the CORESET configuration further includes a CORESET index value and an association between a search space set SS Set in the current CORESET and SS Sets in other CORESETs;
    所述根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,包括:The L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, including:
    检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;Detecting whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
    在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;In the presence of the first CORESET, determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
    在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;In the absence of the first CORESET, detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs;
    在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态;In the presence of two of the second CORESETs, determining that the two second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
    在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;In the case where there are no two second CORESETs, it is detected whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs, the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. The SS Set in the fourth CORESET forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
    在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四 CORESET均包括一个TCI状态。In the presence of the third CORESET, it is determined that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and both the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET include one TCI state.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 7, wherein, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determining the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs The TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, including:
    根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下;The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 8, wherein the first CORESET is the reference CORESET;
    所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
    将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
    将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  10. 根据权利要求8所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 8, characterized in that, in the case that two of the second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs;
    所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
    将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
  11. 根据权利要求8所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,在所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 8, wherein the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs;
    所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine that the PDSCH corresponds to the TCI status, including:
    将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
  12. 根据权利要求7所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态,包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 7, wherein the TCI state corresponding to the L reference CORESETs is determined according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule. The TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, including:
    在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;In the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
    在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle The target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,所述根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,包括;The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 12, wherein the selecting a second target CORESET from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, include;
    将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  14. 根据权利要求1所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法,其特征在于,在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,还包括:The method for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication according to claim 1, wherein after receiving the activation information of the MAC-CE and determining the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the method further comprises:
    通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者Receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval by using the determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
    通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。The two default beams sent by the network device are respectively received within the time interval by using the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  15. 一种终端设备,其特征在于,包括存储器,收发机,处理器;A terminal device, characterized in that it includes a memory, a transceiver, and a processor;
    所述存储器,用于存储计算机程序;所述收发机,用于在所述处理器的控制下收发数据;所述处理器,用于读取所述存储器中的计算机程序并执行 以下操作:The memory is used to store a computer program; the transceiver is used to send and receive data under the control of the processor; the processor is used to read the computer program in the memory and perform the following operations:
    控制所述收发机接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;Control the transceiver to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH. Target transmission mode, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
    在所述收发机接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;Before the transceiver receives the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, the transceiver determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, and determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the corresponding SFN transmission mode of the PDSCH. The target transmission mode determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
    在所述收发机接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the transceiver receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the transceiver is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target enable parameter situation, CORESET selection rule and TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
    其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述RRC信令还携带有PDSCH配置,所述PDSCH配置包括N个TCI状态索引值;所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 15, wherein the RRC signaling further carries a PDSCH configuration, and the PDSCH configuration includes N TCI state index values; the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N大于或者等于2的情况下,将N个TCI状态索引值中的前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态;When the PDSCH is in the SFN transmission mode and N is greater than or equal to 2, the TCI states corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the N TCI state index values are determined as the two TCIs corresponding to the PDSCH state;
    在所述PDSCH为SFN传输方式且N的取值为1的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态。In the case that the PDSCH is the SFN transmission mode and the value of N is 1, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 16, wherein after the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH is determined according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    在N大于或者等于2的情况下,控制所述收发机通过所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束;When N is greater than or equal to 2, controlling the transceiver to receive the two default beams sent by the network device through the two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH respectively;
    在N的取值为1的情况下,控制所述收发机通过所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束。When the value of N is 1, the transceiver is controlled to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  18. 根据权利要求15所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 15, wherein the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为非SFN传输方式的情况下,将随机接入时的同步信号块SSB/信道状态信息CSI-参考信号RS的TCI状态确定为所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态;When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, the TCI state of the synchronization signal block SSB/channel state information CSI-reference signal RS during random access is determined as a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH ;
    在所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对包括一个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将随机接入时的SSB/CSI-RS的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,针对包括至少两个TCI状态索引值的每个CORESET配置,将当前CORESET配置中前两个TCI状态索引值分别对应的TCI状态确定为与当前CORESET配置对应的CORESET所对应的TCI状态,所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态包括每个CORESET对应的TCI状态。When the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET configuration including a TCI state index value, the TCI state of the SSB/CSI-RS during random access is determined to be the same as the current CORESET configuration The TCI state corresponding to the corresponding CORESET, for each CORESET configuration including at least two TCI state index values, determine the TCI state corresponding to the first two TCI state index values in the current CORESET configuration as the CORESET corresponding to the current CORESET configuration The corresponding TCI state, the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH includes the TCI state corresponding to each CORESET.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 18, wherein after the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH is determined according to the target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH, the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    在所述PDCCH为非SFN传输方式的情况下,控制所述收发机通过所述PDCCH对应的一个TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;In the case that the PDCCH is a non-SFN transmission mode, controlling the transceiver to receive a default beam sent by the network device through a TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
    在所述PDCCH为SFN传输方式的情况下,针对每个CORESET,控制所述收发机通过对应的TCI状态接收所述网络设备发送的一个或者两个默认波束。When the PDCCH is the SFN transmission mode, for each CORESET, the transceiver is controlled to receive one or two default beams sent by the network device through the corresponding TCI state.
  20. 根据权利要求15所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 15, wherein the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    在M个CORESET中确定目标带宽部分BWP对应的K个CORESET,所述目标BWP为所述终端设备对应的BWP,K为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;Determine K CORESETs corresponding to the target bandwidth part BWP from the M CORESETs, where the target BWP is the BWP corresponding to the terminal device, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
    在确定K个CORESET之后,根据预设策略确定L个参考CORESET,L 为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K的整数;After the K CORESETs are determined, L reference CORESETs are determined according to the preset strategy, where L is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
    在所述RRC信令中不携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第一CORESET选择规则和第一TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;When the target enable parameter is not carried in the RRC signaling, according to the first CORESET selection rule and the first TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH in the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs state;
    在所述RRC信令中携带所述目标使能参数时,根据第二CORESET选择规则和第二TCI状态选择规则,在所述L个参考CORESET对应的TCI状态中确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the target enable parameter is carried in the RRC signaling, according to the second CORESET selection rule and the second TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH among the TCI states corresponding to the L reference CORESETs .
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述CORESET配置还包括CORESET索引值以及当前CORESET内搜索空间集合SSSet与其他CORESET内SS Set之间的关联;The terminal device according to claim 20, wherein the CORESET configuration further includes a CORESET index value and an association between a search space set SSSet in the current CORESET and SS Sets in other CORESETs;
    所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
    检测K个CORESET中是否存在第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET包括两个TCI状态;Detecting whether there is a first CORESET in the K CORESETs, where the first CORESET includes two TCI states;
    在存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,确定所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET,所述第一CORESET的数量大于或者等于1、小于或者等于K;In the presence of the first CORESET, determine that the first CORESET is the reference CORESET, and the number of the first CORESET is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to K;
    在不存在所述第一CORESET的情况下,检测K个CORESET中是否存在同一时刻SS set形成关联的两个第二CORESET;In the absence of the first CORESET, detect whether there are two second CORESETs associated with the SS set at the same moment in the K CORESETs;
    在存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,确定两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第二CORESET包括一个TCI状态;In the presence of two of the second CORESETs, determining that the two second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs, and the second CORESETs include one TCI state;
    在不存在两个所述第二CORESET的情况下,在K个CORESET中检测是否存在第三CORESET,所述第三CORESET内SS Set与所述目标BWP在另一时刻对应的P个CORESET中的第四CORESET内SS Set形成关联,P为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于3的整数;In the case where there are no two second CORESETs, it is detected whether there is a third CORESET in the K CORESETs, the SS Set in the third CORESET and the P CORESETs corresponding to the target BWP at another moment. The SS Set in the fourth CORESET forms an association, and P is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 3;
    在存在所述第三CORESET的情况下,确定所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET,所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET均包括一个TCI状态。In the presence of the third CORESET, it is determined that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs, and each of the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET includes one TCI state.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 21, wherein the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值,在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第一目标CORESET,并在所述第一目标 CORESET中选择一个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。According to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, a first target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs, and a TCI state is selected from the first target CORESET to determine the TCI corresponding to the PDSCH state.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的终端设备,其特征在于,在所述第一CORESET为所述参考CORESET的情况下;The terminal device according to claim 22, wherein, when the first CORESET is the reference CORESET;
    所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
    将L个所述第一CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第一CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET;determining the first CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L first CORESETs as the first target CORESET;
    将所述第一目标CORESET中的第一个TCI状态或者第二个TCI状态,确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determine the first TCI state or the second TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH.
  24. 根据权利要求22所述的终端设备,其特征在于,在两个所述第二CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;The terminal device according to claim 22, wherein, in the case that two of the second CORESETs are two of the reference CORESETs;
    所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
    将两个所述第二CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述第二CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the second CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the two second CORESETs as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
  25. 根据权利要求22所述的终端设备,其特征在于,在所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET为两个所述参考CORESET的情况下;The terminal device according to claim 22, wherein, in the case that the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET are two of the reference CORESETs;
    所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The processor is also configured to perform the following operations:
    将所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的CORESET确定为所述第一目标CORESET,并将所述第一目标CORESET中的TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态。Determining the CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value in the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET as the first target CORESET, and determining the TCI state in the first target CORESET as the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH .
  26. 根据权利要求21所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 21, wherein the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    在所述参考CORESET为所述第一CORESET的情况下,根据每个所述参考CORESET分别对应的CORESET索引值在所述L个参考CORESET中选择一个第二目标CORESET,将所述第二目标CORESET中的两个TCI状态确定为所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;In the case that the reference CORESET is the first CORESET, a second target CORESET is selected from the L reference CORESETs according to the CORESET index value corresponding to each of the reference CORESETs, and the second target CORESET is The two TCI states in are determined to be the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH;
    在所述参考CORESET为所述第二CORESET或者所述参考CORESET为所述第三CORESET和所述第四CORESET的情况下,根据SS set关联原则将两个所述参考CORESET确定为两个第二目标CORESET,将两个所述第二目标CORESET中的TCI状态进行组合,将组合后的两个TCI状态确定为所述 PDSCH对应的TCI状态。When the reference CORESET is the second CORESET or the reference CORESET is the third CORESET and the fourth CORESET, the two reference CORESETs are determined as two second CORESETs according to the SS set association principle The target CORESET combines the TCI states in the two second target CORESETs, and determines the combined two TCI states as the TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的终端设备,其特征在于,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 26, wherein the processor is further configured to perform the following operations:
    将所述L个参考CORESET中最低CORESET索引值对应的所述参考CORESET确定为所述第二目标CORESET。The reference CORESET corresponding to the lowest CORESET index value among the L reference CORESETs is determined as the second target CORESET.
  28. 根据权利要求15所述的终端设备,其特征在于,在所述收发机接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且所述处理器确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态之后,所述处理器还用于执行以下操作:The terminal device according to claim 15, wherein after the transceiver receives the activation information of the MAC-CE and the processor determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH, the processor further uses to do the following:
    控制所述收发机通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的一个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内接收所述网络设备发送的一个默认波束;或者Controlling the transceiver to receive a default beam sent by the network device within the time interval through a determined TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH; or
    控制所述收发机通过确定的所述PDSCH对应的两个TCI状态在所述时间间隔内分别接收所述网络设备发送的两个默认波束。The transceiver is controlled to respectively receive two default beams sent by the network device within the time interval through the determined two TCI states corresponding to the PDSCH.
  29. 一种传输配置指示TCI状态的确定装置,应用于终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A device for determining a TCI state of a transmission configuration indication, applied to a terminal device, is characterized in that, comprising:
    第一接收模块,用于接收网络设备发送的无线资源控制RRC信令,所述RRC信令携带M个控制资源集CORESET配置、下行共享信道PDSCH对应的单频网络SFN传输方式以及下行控制信道PDCCH对应的目标传输方式,所述CORESET配置包括时频资源位置以及N个TCI状态索引值,M为大于或者等于1的整数,N为大于或者等于1、小于或者等于128的整数;The first receiving module is used to receive the radio resource control RRC signaling sent by the network device, where the RRC signaling carries the CORESET configuration of M control resource sets, the single frequency network SFN transmission mode corresponding to the downlink shared channel PDSCH, and the downlink control channel PDCCH The corresponding target transmission mode, the CORESET configuration includes time-frequency resource locations and N TCI state index values, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and N is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 128;
    第一确定模块,用于在接收到所述网络设备发送的媒体接入控制MAC-控制单元CE的激活信息之前,根据所述PDSCH对应的SFN传输方式确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态、根据所述PDCCH对应的目标传输方式确定所述PDCCH对应的TCI状态;The first determining module is configured to determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH according to the SFN transmission mode corresponding to the PDSCH before receiving the activation information of the medium access control MAC-control element CE sent by the network device, and according to the The target transmission mode corresponding to the PDCCH determines the TCI state corresponding to the PDCCH;
    第二确定模块,用于在接收到所述MAC-CE的激活信息且接收下行控制信息DCI与接收其调度的PDSCH的时间间隔小于预设门限时,根据所述RRC信令中是否携带目标使能参数的情况、CORESET选择规则和TCI状态选择规则,确定所述PDSCH对应的TCI状态;The second determination module is configured to, when the activation information of the MAC-CE is received and the time interval between receiving the downlink control information DCI and receiving the PDSCH scheduled by the MAC-CE is less than a preset threshold, according to whether the RRC signaling carries the target command The condition of the parameters, the CORESET selection rule and the TCI state selection rule, determine the TCI state corresponding to the PDSCH;
    其中,所述目标使能参数用于指示两个默认TCI状态使能,所述预设门限为准共址QCL持续时长,所述终端设备根据M个时频资源位置确定M个CORESET,每个TCI状态索引值对应于一TCI状态,每个CORESET包括至 少一个TCI状态。The target enable parameter is used to indicate that two default TCI states are enabled, the preset threshold is quasi-co-located QCL duration, and the terminal device determines M CORESETs according to the M time-frequency resource positions, each The TCI state index value corresponds to a TCI state, and each CORESET includes at least one TCI state.
  30. 一种处理器可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述处理器可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至14任一项所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法。A processor-readable storage medium, wherein the processor-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the transmission configuration according to any one of claims 1 to 14 is implemented Indicates the method for determining the TCI status.
  31. 一种计算机程序,包括计算机可读代码,其特征在于,当所述计算机可读代码在计算处理设备上运行时,导致所述计算处理设备执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的传输配置指示TCI状态的确定方法。A computer program comprising computer readable code, characterized in that, when the computer readable code is executed on a computing processing device, it causes the computing processing device to perform the transmission as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 14 Configure the determination method to indicate the TCI status.
PCT/CN2022/082267 2021-04-01 2022-03-22 Method and apparatus for determining transmission configuration indicator (tci) state, and terminal device WO2022206489A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110358443.8 2021-04-01
CN202110358443.8A CN115189821B (en) 2021-04-01 2021-04-01 Method and device for determining transmission configuration indication TCI state and terminal equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022206489A1 true WO2022206489A1 (en) 2022-10-06

Family

ID=83457941

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/082267 WO2022206489A1 (en) 2021-04-01 2022-03-22 Method and apparatus for determining transmission configuration indicator (tci) state, and terminal device

Country Status (3)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115189821B (en)
TW (1) TWI795261B (en)
WO (1) WO2022206489A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024077620A1 (en) * 2022-10-14 2024-04-18 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Physical downlink shared channel (pdsch) transmission method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115997366A (en) * 2022-10-21 2023-04-21 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Method, device and storage medium for determining transmission configuration indication state

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109802787A (en) * 2017-11-17 2019-05-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Transmission method, network side equipment and the terminal device of transmission configuration instruction TCI
CN110034853A (en) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 Method for transmitting signals, relevant device and system
CN110959304A (en) * 2018-05-17 2020-04-03 Lg电子株式会社 Method for determining transmission configuration indicator of terminal in wireless communication system and apparatus using the same
CN111727583A (en) * 2018-02-16 2020-09-29 高通股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for indicating status of transmission configuration with respect to quasi co-located group
WO2021008433A1 (en) * 2019-07-12 2021-01-21 FG Innovation Company Limited Method and apparatus for beam management

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200389883A1 (en) * 2017-11-16 2020-12-10 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Configuring spatial qcl reference in a tci state
CN109962765B (en) * 2017-12-22 2020-09-29 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for transmitting wireless signals through PDSCH
CN110474724B (en) * 2018-05-10 2021-08-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 TCI state indication method, terminal and network side equipment
CN111106907B (en) * 2018-10-26 2021-11-30 维沃移动通信有限公司 Indication method and terminal for Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) state
US11201663B2 (en) * 2018-12-20 2021-12-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Transmission configuration indication determination for a shared data channel
BR112021013347A2 (en) * 2019-01-10 2021-09-14 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING OR RECEIVING A PLURALITY OF PHYSICAL DATA CHANNELS, USER EQUIPMENT, NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READable MEDIA, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, AND, WIRELESS NETWORK
US11425745B2 (en) * 2019-03-28 2022-08-23 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Activation indication of transmission configuration groups
JP7364034B2 (en) * 2019-08-14 2023-10-18 日本電気株式会社 Method of reporting channel state information, communication system, and method of scheduling TCI
CN111901876A (en) * 2020-04-30 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Transmission method, device, communication node and storage medium

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109802787A (en) * 2017-11-17 2019-05-24 维沃移动通信有限公司 Transmission method, network side equipment and the terminal device of transmission configuration instruction TCI
CN110034853A (en) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-19 华为技术有限公司 Method for transmitting signals, relevant device and system
CN111727583A (en) * 2018-02-16 2020-09-29 高通股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for indicating status of transmission configuration with respect to quasi co-located group
CN110959304A (en) * 2018-05-17 2020-04-03 Lg电子株式会社 Method for determining transmission configuration indicator of terminal in wireless communication system and apparatus using the same
WO2021008433A1 (en) * 2019-07-12 2021-01-21 FG Innovation Company Limited Method and apparatus for beam management

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024077620A1 (en) * 2022-10-14 2024-04-18 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Physical downlink shared channel (pdsch) transmission method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI795261B (en) 2023-03-01
TW202241106A (en) 2022-10-16
CN115189821A (en) 2022-10-14
CN115189821B (en) 2023-09-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021043058A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus, and transmission receive point, terminal and medium
WO2022206489A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining transmission configuration indicator (tci) state, and terminal device
WO2022151952A1 (en) Information reporting method, information receiving method, terminal device and network device
WO2022028578A1 (en) Signal transmission method, terminal, and network device
WO2022218157A1 (en) Channel processing method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2022068683A1 (en) Bwp configuration method and apparatus, and network-side device and terminal
WO2022152052A1 (en) Pdcch transmission method and apparatus, and terminal and network-side device
WO2023207459A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus, and readable storage medium
US20240188029A1 (en) Reference signal transmission position indication determining method and apparatus
WO2022152317A1 (en) Information processing method and apparatus, terminal, and network device
WO2023202693A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, network device and terminal
WO2024067164A1 (en) Coherent joint transmission method and apparatus
WO2023051689A1 (en) Uplink information sending method, uplink information receiving method, terminal, and network device
WO2024032721A1 (en) Dmrs port determination method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2024125199A1 (en) Beam indication method, device, apparatus, and storage medium
WO2024032719A1 (en) Csi reporting method, terminal, network device, apparatus, and storage medium
WO2024094092A1 (en) Transmission configuration determination method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2022206457A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2024032699A1 (en) Dmrs port determining method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2023197800A1 (en) Pusch sending method, parsing method, terminal, and network device
WO2023202694A1 (en) Signal transmission method and apparatus, terminal, and network device
WO2023000899A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, terminal device, and network device
CN115150029B (en) Physical uplink shared channel repeated transmission method, device and readable storage medium
WO2023207668A1 (en) Method for transmitting physical uplink shared channel, and device and storage medium
WO2022237498A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining repeated transmission, terminal, and network side device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22778672

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22778672

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1